Motorola Workabout Pro4 Long handheld computer User Guide
Διαφήμιση
Διαφήμιση
WORKABOUT PRO4
HAND-HELD COMPUTER
(Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5)
USER GUIDE
WORKABOUT PRO4 HAND-HELD COMPUTER
USER GUIDE
8000295.A
January 6, 2014
i
ii Workabout Pro4 User Manual
This user manual supports the model number 7528X which contains the approved radio module 21-148603-0B. The applicable FCC ID and Industry Canada numbers are as follows:
• FCC ID: UZ7211486030B
• IC: 109AN-211486030B'
Copyright
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form, or by any electrical or mechanical means, without permission in writing from Motorola. This includes electronic or mechanical means, such as photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems. The material in this manual is subject to change without notice.
The software is provided strictly on an “as is” basis. All software, including firmware, furnished to the user is on a licensed basis. Motorola grants to the user a non-transferable and non-exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder (licensed program). Except as noted below, such license may not be assigned, sublicensed, or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of
Motorola. No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted, except as permitted under copyright law. The user shall not modify, merge, or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material, create a derivative work from a licensed program, or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Motorola. The user agrees to maintain Motorola’s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder, and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes, in whole or in part. The user agrees not to decompile, disassemble, decode, or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof.
Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability, function, or design.
Motorola does not assume any product liability arising out of, or in connection with, the application or use of any product, circuit, or application described herein.
No license is granted, either expressly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise under any Motorola, Inc., intellectual property rights. An implied license only exists for equipment, circuits, and subsystems contained in
Motorola products.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date. In addition, changes are periodically incorporated into new editions of the publication.
Motorola reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and shall not be responsible for any damages including, but not limited to, consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented.
Motorola, the Motorola logo, Workabout Pro4 and the names of other products and services provided by
Motorola are trademarks of Motorola.
Windows® and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Motorola is under license.
All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.
Revision History
Changes to the original guide are listed below:
Change Date
-01 Rev A 01/2014 Initial release.
Description
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Table of Contents
About This Guide
Chapter 1: Basic Operation
Chapter 2: Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4
vi Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Table of Contents vii
Chapter 3: Programs
Sending & Ending Phone Calls Using the Onscreen Phone Keypad.................................. 3-4
viii Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Chapter 4: Settings
Table of Contents ix
Setup ............................................................................................................................ 4-14
The Devices Tab - Scanning for
Bluetooth
Devices........................................................... 4-14
x Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Table of Contents xi
Chapter 5: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
xii Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Appendix A: Port Pinouts
Appendix B: DataWedge
Appendix C: Scanner Services
Table of Contents xiii
Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications
Appendix E: Workabout Pro4 Specifications
Radio ....................................................................................................................... E-10
Appendix F: Wireless Zero Config Settings
Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
SE655 LED Device – Class 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
SE965 & SE4500 Lasers – Class 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi
About This Guide xvii
About This Manual
This user manual describes how to configure, operate, and maintain the Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held
Computer.
provides a basic overview of the Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held.
describes the steps required to get the Workabout Pro4 ready for operation.
Chapter 2: Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4
describes Workabout Pro4 features, including how to charge and maintain the battery, the keyboard features, the display, using the internal scanner, etc. This chapter also describes how to navigate the Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Embedded Hand-Held
6.5 Today
screen, how to transfer data between the Workabout Pro4 and a PC and how to manage files and folders.
provides a description of the Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Embedded Hand-Held 6.5
Programs
applets and how to use them.
provides details about Microsoft
®
Windows
®
Embedded Hand-Held
Settings
applets and how to use them.
Chapter 5: Peripheral Devices & Accessories
describes the peripherals and accessories available for your Workabout Pro4 computer.
describes pinouts for the Workabout Pro4 docking connector, connectors, battery contacts, and vehicle cradle cable connectors.
points to detailed documentation about the DataWedge mobile device application that allows any application to receive data from barcode, RFID, magnetic stripe and serial devices.
details the Scanner Services application.
Appendix D: Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications
lists the specifications for the Workabout Pro4 scanners and imagers.
Appendix E: Workabout Pro4 Specifications
lists the specifications for your Workabout Pro4 computer, radios, and battery.
Appendix F: Wireless Zero Config Settings
outlines how to launch and use Wireless Zero Config to configure the radio.
Appendix G: Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
provides WWAN configuration information.
xviii Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Text Conventions
NOTE
Notes highlight additional helpful information.
IMPORTANT
These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment.
WARNING
These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.
Overview of the Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer
The Workabout Pro4 is a modular, industrial hand-held computer available in two form factors: Long and Short.
Several options are available to suit applications in courier/delivery, field service, meter reading, asset management, warehousing and logistics, manufacturing and other specialized data capture applications.
NOTE
The Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer is a body-worn device. To maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines, use a Motorola approved carrying case. Use of non-approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
NOTE
For product specifications, refer to
Appendix E: “Workabout Pro4 Specifications”
Model
• 7528X
Platform (standard)
• CPU: Sitara™ AM37x ARM Cortex™-A8 processor
• Memory: 512 MB RAM/4GB Flash
Operating System
• Microsoft Windows
®
Embedded Hand-Held 6.5
Bundled Applications
• Internet Explorer
®
6
• Wordpad
®
• ActiveSync
®
®
• Microsoft® Office
(Windows Hand-Held Embedded 6.5 only)
Terminal Emulations
• TekTerm Client Terminal Emulation
• Stay-Linked Terminal Emulation
• Naurtech Browser
About This Guide xix
• Naurtech Terminal Emulation
• Wavelink Terminal Emulation
Additional Software
• Kiosk
• MobiControl
• A.R.C.
• Total Recall/TweakIt/Dr. Debug
• Windows® Mobile Device Center
Wireless Data and Voice Communications
Standard
•
Bluetooth®
- Integrated
Bluetooth®
V2 + EDR
• WLAN - 802.11a/b/g/n WiFi. Optional diversity antenna module available.
NOTE
Optional diversity antenna module available (model number RA3052).
Optional
• WWAN - 3.8G HSPA + Radio
NOTE
Data only. In the Americas the Workabout Pro4 is not approved to be used with any VoIP application using Wide Area Network (WAN) or Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN).
• GPS
Option 1: GPS receiver with SBAS support
Option 2: GPS receiver with GLONASS support (only available with WWAN option)
NOTE
802.11a/b/g/n and
Bluetooth
are available simultaneously.
Barcode Scanners (optional)
• SE9651D Laser
• SE655 1D Imager
• SE1524 1D Laser
• SE4500 1D/2D Imager
NOTE
All scan engines are available factory configured or user installable as either an end-cap or slim pod.
RFID Modules
• LF Module
- Frequency: 125 kHz
- Protocols supported: EM 4x02; EM 4x05; EM 4x50; EM 4200; Q5; Hitag 1 & 2; Hitag
• UHF Module
- Frequency: 868 MHz or 915 MHz
xx Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
- Supported: EPC Class 1 Gen 2; ISO 18000-6C
• HF Module
- Frequency: 13.56 MHz
- Protocols supported: ISO14443 type A, B and C, ISO 15693; NFC “Reader to Tag” Mode; full Mifare support
- Data encryption: 2 SAM slots; ID1 SAM format; Class A, B and C
User Interface
• Display
- Transflective colour/touch display 9.4 cm (3.7 in) VGA/QVGA (640 x 480)
- Sunlight visibility with 240 cd/m
2
brightness
• Keyboards
- Alphanumeric (7528 Long)
- QWERTY or Numeric (7528 Short)
- High reliability keypad with ultra-white backlight
• Voice & Audio
- Push-to-Talk –
VoIP (
In the Americas the Workabout Pro4 is not approved to be used with any VoIP application using Wide Area Network (WAN) or Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN).)
- Standard integrated microphone and receiver.
- Standard high volume 86dBA beeper (95dBA beeper with extended ranger laser).
- Optional speech module, certified with Vocollect and Wavelink Speakeasy clients.
Power Management
• 4400 mAh Lithium-ion battery – Model No. WA3010
• Super capacitor power backup
Regulatory Labels
Each scanner has a laser warning label accompanied by a protective housing and certificate label.
WARNING
Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
SE655 LED Device – Class 1
LED Compliance Statement
Classified as “EXEMPT RISK GROUP” according to IEC 62471:2006 and EN 62471:2008
Figure 1
SE655 End-Cap LED Warning Label - Class 1
About This Guide xxi
Figure 2
SE655 Slim Pod Laser Window Warning Label
SE965 & SE4500 Lasers – Class 2
Figure 3
SE965 End-Cap Laser Warning Label
xxii Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Figure 4
SE965 Slim Pod Laser Window Warning Label
Figure 5
SE965 Protective Housing and Certificate Label
Figure 6
SE4500 End-Cap Laser/LED Warning Label
Figure 7
SE4500 Slim Pod Laser Window Warning Label
About This Guide xxiii
Figure 8
SE4500 Protective Housing and Certificate Label
CHAPTER 1 BASIC OPERATION
Performing a Warm Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
Performing a Cold Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
Performing a Clean Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1
Basic Operation 1 - 3
Workabout Pro4 Features
Figure 1-1
Front View of the Workabout Pro4 7528 Long Alphanumeric Keyboard
Speaker
Microphone
LED
(Light Emitting Diode)
Figure 1-2
Front View of Workabout Pro4 7528 Short Numeric Keyboard (QWERTY keyboard also available)
Workabout Pro4 Modules Available
To see a current list of Workabout Pro4 accessories and modules, go to the website at: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Psion/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_p_handheld
1 - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Documents Available
To see a current list of documents and download what you need, go to the Knowledge Base on
IngenuityWorking community website: http://community.psion.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/product-manuals.aspx
Preparing the Workabout Pro4 for Operation
The Battery
The Workabout Pro4 can be powered by the following Lithium-ion battery pack:
• 4400 mAh – WA3010
IMPORTANT
Before charging the battery, it is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in the Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000296).
Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% and must be fully charged prior to use. Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking cradles. For detailed information, see
.
Replacing the Battery Pack
IMPORTANT
). However, assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of minutes — you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame.
NOTE
If you are using a cradle or an external power supply, you can insert an uncharged battery and use the device while the battery charges.
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, a battery can be removed for up to 4 minutes without losing data. Beyond 4 minutes, the hand-held may reboot.
Removing the Battery Pack
1.
If your unit is equipped with a hand strap, unhook it from the base of the battery.
2.
Turn the latches at the bottom of the battery to unlock the battery cover. Remove the battery.
Installing the Battery Pack
1.
Insert the charged battery into the unit making certain that the contacts on the battery match those on the hand-held. Replace the battery cover and lock both latches to secure the battery in place.
2.
If your computer is equipped with a hand strap, re-attach the clip to the slot at the base of the battery.
3.
Switch the unit on (see
“Switching the Workabout Pro4 On and Off” on page 1-5
).
Basic Operation 1 - 5
Switching the Workabout Pro4 On and Off
Follow the instructions below for your Workabout Pro4.
Switching the Workabout Pro4 On
• Press and hold the
[Power]
button down for at least one second.
When the unit is turned off, it automatically enters a power-saving “suspend” state. When the Workabout Pro4 is switched on from the suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds in the screen in which you were working prior to turning the computer off.
IMPORTANT
If your Workabout Pro4 fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:
The battery may be overheated (>60C°), a non-Motorola battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend
“Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 4-10
for details.
To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery.
However, if you supply AC power to the Workabout Pro4 with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.
Switching the Workabout Pro4 Off
• To switch off the Workabout Pro4, press the
[Power]
button. The Workabout Pro4 will automatically enter the
Suspend
state.
IMPORTANT
Turning off the hand-held does not result in a complete shutdown; rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the
Workabout Pro4 is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.
To shut down the unit, press and hold down the [Power] button until the
Power Option
screen is displayed where you can choose the
Power off
option.
Resetting the Workabout Pro4
To perform a variety of Workabout Pro4 resets, you can use the keyboard shortcuts described below.
Performing a Warm Reset
During a
warm reset
, running programs are halted. The contents of the file system, Application directory (Flash
Disk), and the registry are preserved. Keep in mind, however, that RAM content is
not
preserved.
• Press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE]
key and the
[Power]
button simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds.
The Motorola splash screen appears, and the unit resets.
NOTE
You do not need to reset your unit after configuring the radio.
1 - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Performing a Cold Reset
A
cold reset
reinitializes all hardware. All RAM including the RAM disk is erased. Non-volatile storage such as the Application directory (Flash disk) is preserved, as is the file system.
To execute a cold reset:
• Press and hold down the
[FN/ORANGE]
key, the
[FN/BLUE]
key, and the
[Power]
button, simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds.
Performing a Clean Start
A
clean start
returns the Workabout Pro4 to factory settings, flushes the registry keys and deletes volatile storage.
• Press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE]
key, the
[Power]
button and the
[Front SCAN]
key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
The Workabout Pro4 displays the Boot to BooSt menu.
• On an
alpha and QWERTY keyboard
, type
.clean
.
• On a
numeric keyboard
, type
.25326
.
Boot to BooSt
If you choose Boot to BooSt, the BooSt menu is loaded.
1.
Press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE]
key,
[Power]
button and
[Front SCAN]
key for a minimum of four seconds.
2.
Press
[1]
to launch the
OS
.
Attaching Carrying Accessories
Motorola recommends that a carrying accessory — a hand strap — be installed on the Workabout Pro4 before
use. For detailed information, see “Carrying Accessories” on page -3 .
Calibrating the Touchscreen
The Workabout Pro4 touchscreen feature is factory-calibrated and ready-to-go; however, over time the touchscreen's operating parameters may change, and it may need to be recalibrated for correct operation. Refer to
“Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 2-10
for details.
Imager and Scanner Options
and specifications.
Connectivity
For information on connecting the Workabout Pro4 to a PC, refer to
“Data Transfer Between Workabout Pro4 and a PC” on page 2-28 .
Basic Operation 1 - 7
The Workabout Pro4 contains an 802.11a/b/g/n radio module. The
Fusion Wireless Companion
software contains applications to create wireless profiles. To configure the radio, follow the steps outlined under the heading
“Fusion Wireless Companion - Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio” on page 4-31
.
To configure your
Bluetooth
settings, go to “Bluetooth Setup” on page 4-14
.
If you have a GPS (Global Positioning System) module, you can choose from a set of GPS profiles built into
.
Data Transfer
Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC. Various options exist depending on whether you are using Windows XP or earlier, Windows Vista
®
or Windows 7. For connection details, refer to
“Data Transfer Between Workabout Pro4 and a PC” on page 2-28
.
Phone Communication
If the Cinterion PHS8-P HSPA+ radio modem is installed and enabled, the
Phone icon
and the
GSM signal strength icon
will appear when you tap on the navigation bar at the top of the screen. The keyboards are
and
“The Phone – Managing Settings” on page 4-44
.
CHAPTER 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
WORKABOUT PRO4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR WORKABOUT PRO4
Battery Swap Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Charging the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
The [Power] Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Standard Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Function Keys and Macro Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Macro Keys (Workabout Pro4 Long only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Adjusting the Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Calibrating the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Locking the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Inserting and Removing the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Basic Scanner Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2
2 - 2 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Operating 1D Internal Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Operating Internal 2D Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Navigating in Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 and Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Navigating Using a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Navigating Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Customizing the Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
The Today Screen Default Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Time, Date and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Creating and Editing Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Deleting Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
The Start Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Creating a New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Renaming, Copying, and Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Uploading Data in a Single Bay USB Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Using Microsoft ActiveSync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Using Windows Mobile Device Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Caring for the Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Cleaning the Workabout Pro4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 3
Operating System
• Microsoft® Windows® Embedded Hand-Held 6.5
Battery Details
Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer is available with the following Lithium-ion battery pack option:
• 4400 mAh battery – Model Number WA3010
• Super capacitor power backup
Review the following sections for detailed battery information:
• Installation:
“Preparing the Workabout Pro4 for Operation” on page 1-4
.
• Power settings:
.
• Chargers and cradles:
Chapter 5: “Peripheral Devices & Accessories” .
•
Specifications: “Battery Specifications” on page E-4
.
• Contact pinout:
“Battery Contact Pinout – WA3010” on page A-4 .
Battery Safety
IMPORTANT
Before attempting to install, use, or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled
Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide, PN 8000296
Battery Swap Time
Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered, battery swap time is a minimum of 4 minutes — you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame.
To protect data, the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally on a USB memory stick or on a PC. You can also save data in the “Application” (Flash Disk) partition of the file system.
Refer to
“Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 4-10 for details about reserving battery
power for data backup purposes.
The
Suspend Threshold
adjustment in the
Power Properties
tab allows you to determine the battery capacity at which the Workabout Pro4 will be shut down. If left at the default value,
Maximum Operating Time
, the unit will run until the battery is completely empty; the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time. If you choose
Maximum Backup Time
, the Workabout Pro4 shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time.
2 - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
IMPORTANT
If your Workabout Pro4 fails to power up, consider the following troubleshooting options:
The battery may be overheated (>60C°), a non-Motorola battery may be installed, or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend
Threshold. See
“Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup” on page 4-10
for details.
To switch on the hand-held, you will need to replace the overheated battery.
However, if you supply AC power to the Workabout Pro4 with a battery that falls below the configured
Suspend Threshold, the unit will switch on.
Charging the Battery
IMPORTANT
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO INSTRUCTIONS.
Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40% of capacity. Lithium-ion battery packs must be fully charged before use. These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking
Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery.
% Charge Completed
100% 4 hrs.
75% 2 hrs.
Charge Time
IMPORTANT
To avoid damaging the battery, chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).
The Keyboard
Keyboard options varied depending on the Workabout Pro4 model
Workabout Pro4 Version
Workabout Pro4 Long
Workabout Pro4 Short
Keyboard Type Available
Alphanumeric only
Numeric
or
QWERTY
This hand-held is equipped with a [Power] button in the lower left corner of the keyboard.
The [FN/BLUE] modifier key provides access to additional keys and system functions. These functions are colour coded in blue print above the keyboard keys.
NOTE
Almost all keys can be reprogrammed to suit your requirements.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 5
The [Power] Button
The [Power] button in the lower left corner of the keyboard switches the unit on and off.
Standard Keys
The [ENTER] Key
The [ENTER] key is used to execute the usual Enter keyboard functions.
The [SHIFT] Key
The [SHIFT] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and to provide access to other symbols and functions on the numeric keyboards. Press the [SHIFT] key to turn the shift state 'on' (it will be represented in the shift-state indicator in the navigation bar at the top of the screen), then press another key to access the shifted function of that key.
Press the [SHIFT] key twice to lock the shift state on (the shift-state will be outlined in a black frame to indicate it is locked ‘on’). It is now in CAPS LOCK mode. Press [SHIFT] again to turn the shift state off.
The Arrow Keys
The [Arrow] keys are located near the top of the keyboard, and are represented on the keyboard as triangles pointing in different directions. The [Arrow] keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow: up, down, left and right. The left arrow key should not be confused with the [BACKSPACE] key which is depicted as a left arrow. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear.
The [BACKSPACE/DEL] Key
The [BACKSPACE] key (represented on the keyboard as an arrow pointing left) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the previous key stroke.
The [DEL] key ([FN] +[BACKSPACE]) erases the character at the current cursor position.
The [CTRL] and [ALT] Key
The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent.
Pressing either key twice locks it 'on'. Pressing the key once again unlocks it.
The [TAB] Key
Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward.
The [ESC] Key
Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog box, or activity.
The [SPACE] Key
The [SPACE] key is represented on the keyboard by a long, horizontal line bracketed by a small vertical line on each side. Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog box, pressing the
[SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.
The [SCAN] Key
The Workabout Pro4 is equipped with a single [SCAN] key at the top of the keyboard and two [SCAN] buttons located on the left and right sides of the unit. [SCAN] keys activate the scanner beam. For units that do not have internal scanners, these keys can be remapped to serve other functions.
2 - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Volume Control – [UP ARROW] [DOWN ARROW]
The volume keys are located above the [UP ARROW] and [DOWN ARROW] and are labelled with blue icons - the [UP ARROW] is labelled with a plus (+) symbol indicating volume increase while the [DOWN ARROW] is labelled with a minus (-) symbol indicating volume decrease.
• To increase the volume, press the
[FN/BLUE]
key followed by the
[UP ARROW]
key.
• To decrease the volume, press
[FN/BLUE]
followed by the
[DOWN ARROW]
key.
Modifier Keys
The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [FN/BLUE] and [FN/ORANGE] keys are modifier keys. Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed. For example, on a Workabout Pro4 Short Qwerty keyboard, a bracket is printed in orange print above the [U] key. Pressing the [FN/ORANGE] key followed by the [U] key displays a bracket rather than the letter U.
The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded
(two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.
Activating Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed, it is represented in the shift-state indicator icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen, making it easier to determine whether or not a modifier key is active. For example, when the
[FN/BLUE] key is pressed, it is represented in blue in the shift-state indicator icon at the top of the screen.
Figure 2-1
Shift-State Indicator Icon
Shift-state indicator icon
Locking Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is locked ‘on’, it will remain active until it is pressed again to unlock or turn it off.
To help you identify when a modifier key is locked ‘on’, the key is represented in the shift-state indicator icon with a
black
frame around it.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 7
Figure 2-2
Shift-State Indicator Icon – Locked/Unlocked Modifier Key
Shift-state indicator icon
Unlocked modifier key indicator
Locked modifier key indicator
Once a modifier key is unlocked or turned off, it is no longer displayed in the shift-state indicator icon.
NOTE
The locking function of the modifier keys can be changed so that pressing a modifier key
once
will lock it ‘on’.
If you disable the ‘One Shot’ function of the key, pressing it once will lock the key ‘on’. Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it ‘off’. Refer to
“OneShots” on page 4-39 for details.
Function Keys and Macro Keys
In addition to the standard keyboard functions, the Workabout Pro4 supports Function keys and Macro keys
(Macro keys are only available on Workabout Pro4 Long units).
All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application.
Function Keys
Function keys perform special, custom-defined functions within an application. These keys are accessed by pressing one of the dedicated function keys on the keyboard, or through the appropriate [SHIFT] or [FN] key sequence, depending on the keyboard variant being used.
All Workabout Pro4 keyboards are equipped with a total of 14 function keys. Function keys [F1] to [F4] located near the top of the keyboard are directly accessible – a key combination is not required. Ten additional function keys from [F1] to [F10] are colour coded in blue print on the unit body; these keys are accessed by executing a key combination, [FN/BLUE] followed by the appropriate key.
For example, to access [F6] on a QWERTY keyboard:
• Press the [FN/BLUE] key followed by the [F] alpha key – the alpha key to which function key [F6] is mapped.
Macro Keys (Workabout Pro4 Long only)
IMPORTANT
Refer to “Macro Keys” on page 4-40 for details about creating macros.
Workabout Pro4 Long units are equipped with 10 Macro keys. Workabout Pro4 Short hand-helds are not equipped with these keys. Macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with
2 - 8 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
the function of executable keys like the [ENTER] key, the [BACKSPACE] key, any function key and arrow key, etc.
Alphanumeric keyboards have ten macro keys: [M1] to [M10]. These keys are colour coded in orange print above the numeric keys.
To access a macro key:
• Press the
[FN/ORANGE]
key followed by the appropriate numeric key from [1] to [0].
For example, to access macro key
[M1]
, press
[FN/ORANGE] [1]
.To access macro key
[M2]
, press
[FN/ORANGE] [2]
, and so on.
Whether your keyboard does or does not have macro keys physically stamped on the keyboard, up to 15 macro functions can be added using the
Scancode Remapping
function. Refer to
“Scancode Remapping” on page 4-42
for details about mapping keys.
Numeric Keyboards — Accessing Alpha Keys
On Numeric Workabout Pro4 keyboards, all alphabetic characters are printed on the unit plastic in blue typeface above the keys. Alpha characters are accessed by pressing the [FN] modifier key, then pressing another key on the keyboard.
Alpha Modified Numeric 789 keyboards have each blue alphabetic character assigned as a single [FN]-shifted character on individual keys.
Numeric 123 keyboards have telephone-style alphabetic keys, with the blue alphabetic characters located in groups of 3 or 4 above each of the numeric keys. To access characters on these keyboards, a few extra steps are needed, as described below.
Choosing a Single Alpha Character
NOTE
The following examples assume that the [FN/ORANGE] key is enabled as
‘Lock’ mode in the ‘One Shot’ screen (accessed by choosing Start>Settings>Personal>Buttons icon). In ‘Lock’ mode, pressing the [FN/ORANGE] key once locks it ‘on’. Refer to
for details.
The examples below illustrate how to access A, B and C, all of which are printed in blue characters above the numeric key [2] on a numeric keyboard.
IMPORTANT
The letters you choose appear in the shift-indicator icon at the top of the screen, providing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen.
To choose the letter ‘a’:
1.
Press the
[FN/ORANGE]
key, and press the numeric key
[2]
.
2.
Press the
[FN/ORANGE]
key again to unlock or turn it off.
NOTE
To choose the second, third or fourth alpha character assigned to a numeric key, you may want to lock the [FN/ORANGE] key ‘on’. Remember that depending on how your Workabout Pro4 is set up in the ‘One Shots’ tab, you may find that you
need to press the [FN/ORANGE] key twice to lock it ‘on’. Refer to “One-
Shot/Lock” on page 4-40 for details.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 9
To choose the letter ‘b’:
1.
Lock the
[FN/ORANGE]
key ‘on’, and press
[2]
twice.
2.
Press the
[FN/ORANGE]
key again to unlock or turn it off.
To choose the letter ‘c’:
1.
Lock the
[FN/ORANGE]
key ‘on’, and press
[2]
three times.
2.
Press the
[FN/ORANGE]
key again to unlock or turn it off.
NOTE
Keep in mind that there is a timeout of one second between key presses when sequencing through the alphabetic characters on a key. If you pause longer than one second between key presses, the alphabetic character that is displayed at that time will be entered.
Creating Uppercase Letters
To display capital letters, you need to first lock the [SHIFT] key ‘on’.
• Press the [SHIFT] key twice.
All alpha keys are displayed in uppercase until you press the [SHIFT] key again to ‘unlock’ (switch off) the function of this key.
Choosing Multiple Alpha Characters
• Lock the
[FN/ORANGE]
key ‘on’
Each time you press a numeric key from [2] through [9], an alpha character will be displayed on the screen.
Remember that you can refer to the softkey bar for a visual indication of which alpha key will be displayed on the screen.
NOTE
Once you have finished typing alpha characters, remember to turn off or unlock the [FN/ORANGE] key. Check the shift-state indicator icon (refer to
2-1 Shift-State Indicator Icon on page 2-6
) to make certain that the key is turned off.
The Keypad Backlight
The intensity of the keypad backlight can be configured using the
Backlight
icon accessed by tapping on
Start>Settings>System>Backlight
. Refer to “Backlight – Screen and Keypad” on page 4-51
for details about this option.
NOTE
Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
The Display
The Workabout Pro4 is equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions.
The backlight switches on when a key is pressed.
2 - 10 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Adjusting the Display Backlight
To set the backlight intensity and the duration of time that the backlight will remain on, you’ll need to choose the
Backlight
icon.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
and then, tap on
System>Backlight
icon.
Refer to
“Backlight – Screen and Keypad” on page 4-51 for details.
Calibrating the Touchscreen
If your touchscreen has never been aligned (calibrated) or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, follow the steps below.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
. Tap on the
Screen
icon.
The
General
tab is displayed in which you can correct alignment and choose screen orientation (see
for details).
• Tap on the
Align Screen
button, and follow the directions on the screen to align (calibrate) the screen.
NOTE
This window provides two additional tabs: ClearType and Text Size. Tapping on the ClearType tab allows you to enable the ClearType option to smooth screen font appearance. The Text
Size tab allows you to increase or decrease the size of the font displayed on the screen.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 11
Screen Orientation
In addition to screen calibration, the
Screen
icon allows you to determine how your screen will be oriented –
portrait
or
landscape (right- or left-handed).
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
icon.
• Tap on the
Screen
icon.
• In the
General
tab, tap on the orientation that best suits the way in which you use your Workabout Pro4.
Locking the Touchscreen
If you need to lock your touchscreen to protect against accidental actions:
• At the
Today
screen, tap on the
Start
icon.
• Tap on the
Lock icon
in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen. A sliding lock is displayed on the screen.
Sliding lock
Lock icon
• Place the stylus on the sliding lock, flick it to the right and release to unlock the touchscreen and display the screen options.
Indicators
The Workabout Pro4 uses a LED (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages, and audio tones as indicators.
LED
The Workabout Pro4 is equipped with a single, orange coloured LED. This section outlines what the
LED indicates.
Charge LED Behaviour
3 flashes, pause, repeat
Rapid blinking for 1 second
Fast blip (500 ms period, 13% duty cycle)
Indication
‘Power on’ was attempted. Unit will retry.
Reset or resume is being ignored because the battery door is open. If the door is closed during this process, reset or resume will proceed normally.
Windows is in “unattended mode”.
2 - 12 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Charge LED Behaviour
Slow blink (2 second period, 50% duty cycle)
Solid Orange
Indication
Charge temperature fault.
Booting/resuming.
Audio Indicators
The Workabout Pro4 supports several audio options, including a
Bluetooth
headset. Sounds are emitted through the front receiver. The beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound to signal a number of events such as screen taps, notifications, and so on. Information on configuring sounds is
detailed in “Sounds Tab” on page 4-12 .
Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card
There are two slots available when the battery is removed from the battery compartment — the smaller slot to the left is used to load the
microSD
(Secure Digital) card, which provides additional non-volatile memory to your Workabout Pro4, and the slot to the right is used to load a
SIM
(Subscriber Identity Module) card, which allows access to the Voice option, access to the Internet, and so on.
Inserting and Removing the Cards
1.
Switch off the power to the Workabout Pro4.
2.
Remove the battery.
To insert a microSD card:
1.
Flip up the rubber cover of the microSD card door on the left.
2.
Slide the microSD card into the slot until it clicks into place. (The microSD slot is spring-loaded.)
3.
Push the rubber cover back in place.
4.
To remove the microSD card, lift the rubber cover and push the microSD card inward until it pops out of the slot.
The SIM slot is equipped with a release tab. To insert a SIM card:
1.
Slide the SIM card into the slot on the right until it clicks into place.
2.
To remove the SIM card, depress the metal release tab and slide the card out of the slot.
Scanners and Imagers
IMPORTANT
It is critical that you review the “Laser Warnings” in the Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held
Computer Regulatory & Warranty Guide (PN 8000296) before using any of the scanners described in this chapter.
NOTE
To enable a newly-installed imager or scanner, press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE] key and the [Power] button for a minimum of three seconds.
The Workabout Pro4 supports a wide range of scanner options to address a variety of user application requirements. Refer to the following sections for detailed information:
• Scanner list and specifications:
Appendix D: “Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications” .
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 13
•
Configuration: Appendix B: “DataWedge”
, Appendix C: “Scanner Services”
and “Manage Triggers” on page 4-57
.
•
outlines the mechanics of a successful scan.
• Barcode Parameters:
Appendix C: “Scanner Services”
.
•
“Troubleshooting” provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail.
Basic Scanner Operations
• Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
• Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.
Scanning Techniques
• Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the barcode.
• Do not hold the scanner directly over the barcode. In this position, light can reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode.
• Scan the entire barcode. If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner, make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the barcode, including the margins on either end of the symbol.
• If you are using a 2D imaging scanner, make certain the red, oval shaped framing mark is centered within the barcode you want to scan.
• When using imaging scanners, do not move the scanner while decoding the barcode. Movement blurs the image.
• Hold the scanner farther away for larger barcodes.
• Hold the scanner closer for barcodes with bars that are close together.
Troubleshooting
If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:
• Is the unit on?
• Check that the barcode symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand-held you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the barcode.
• Check the barcode to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different barcode to verify that the problem is not with the barcode.
• Check that the barcode is within the proper range.
• Does the hand-held display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the hand-held.
• Is the laser beam scanning across the barcode?
• Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for dirt or fogging.
Operating 1D Internal Laser Scanners
• Turn the hand-held on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
• Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed.
2 - 14 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Operating Internal 2D Imagers
An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single barcode or multiple barcodes (at one time). It can find a barcode regardless of its orientation — that is, even a barcode printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand-held will be decoded successfully.
NOTE
When scanning
multiple
barcodes, ensure that all of the desired barcodes are within the field of view of the scanner. It is possible that even when all barcodes are within the field of view, not all of them will be decoded. Only successfully decoded barcodes are passed to the application program. The application program then issues a warning, asking that you scan the missing barcodes.
When scanning a
single
barcode, ensure that only the desired barcode is within the field of view of the scanner.
Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners, some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of barcodes being scanned. Although the imager includes illumination LEDs, ambient light will help the imager decode the barcodes, especially if the barcode is far from the hand-held.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera, and the LED illumination is a flash. Glare can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated barcodes, just as glare is an issue for photographers. When pointing at a shiny surface, either shift the barcode to the side or top, or angle the barcode so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner.
Most imagers take several ‘snap shots’ of the barcode in order to decode it. It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times. Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance.
• Turn the hand-held computer on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
• Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger. Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan result is obtained.
• When the scan button or trigger is pressed, a red, oval shaped light (the framing marker) is displayed.
Centre the framing marker in the field — either in the centre of the barcode you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple barcodes are to be scanned.
The illumination LEDs will flash (typically several times) and a picture of the barcode is taken.
Navigating in Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 and Applications
Graphic user interfaces like Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 for portable devices or desktop Windows (XP,
Windows 7, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. On the Workabout Pro4, this is accomplished using a touchscreen and stylus rather than a mouse.
Navigating Using a Touchscreen
NOTE
If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, it may need
recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 2-10
.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 15
A touchscreen is a standard feature on all Workabout Pro4 hand-held computers. Each is shipped with a stylus
– a pointing tool.
• Use the stylus to tap on the appropriate icon to open files and folders, launch applications and programs, make selections, and so on. You can also use your finger rather than the stylus.
• Tap and flick the stylus or your finger on the screen to scroll through the options on a screen.
• Tap on the navigation bar to display additional icons.
Navigating Using the Keyboard
If you prefer to use the keyboard to move the cursor around the screens on your Workabout Pro4, refer to table following for a description of the navigation keys.
Operation
Switch between active applications
Open task manager
Move the cursor
Open file, folder or icon
Exit & Save
Close/Exit & Do Not Save
Navigate Dialog Boxes
Key or Key Combination
[ALT] [TAB]
[ALT] [ESC]
Arrow keys
[ENTER]
[ENTER]
[ESC]
[TAB]
To move cursor up [SHIFT] [TAB]
To display the contents of the next ‘tab’ in a dialog box [CTRL] [TAB]
Select Radio Button/Press Button [SPACE]
Go to Start Menu [Windows]
Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, the Workabout Pro4 does not support key chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by the next in sequence.
The Today Screen
The
Today
screen provides quick access to a default list of applets such as phone, voicemail, and so on. This screen is also equipped with a navigation bar along the top of the screen which provides access to hotkeys.
Hotkeys act as shortcuts to apps. Along the bottom of the screen, a softkey bar contains softkeys that help you navigate – in particular, the
Start
button which provides access to everything else you’ll need to work with
Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5.
2 - 16 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Navigation bar
Start button
Softkey bar
Softkeys
• Use the stylus or your finger to scroll to and highlight the option you want to work with. The highlighted option displays information specific to the applet. For example, highlighting the
Calendar
option lets you know if there are any appointments.
• Tap on any highlighted option to display the associated dialog box. Note that you can also double-tap on any option to display the associated dialog box.
Depending on which option you tap on, the softkeys at the bottom of the screen change to help support working with the particular option you’ve chosen.
Customizing the Today Screen
The items you see in the
Today
screen are
Windows
defaults. To customize the screen to suit your purposes:
• Tap on the
Start
button. Tap on the
Settings
icon followed by the
Home
icon.
• In the scrolling tab bar at the top of the screen, scroll to the
Items
tab.
The items you select will appear in the
Today
screen. Once you’ve chosen the items to appear on the
Today
screen, you can also tailor the order in which you want the items to appear:
• Highlight an
item
. Tap on the
Move Up
and
Move Down
buttons to order your selections.
When you choose items for the
Today
screen using this method, the appearance of the
Today
screen will change to a list format.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 17
The Today Screen Default Options
A list of options are available from the Today screen. Keep in mind that these can be altered using the method described above in
“Customizing the Today Screen” on page 2-16
. You can also refer to “Shell Settings” on page 4-63
for additional customization options.
Pictures
This option provides access to the
Pictures & Videos
applet. Refer to
“Pictures & Videos” on page 3-17
for details.
Music
Tapping on the
Music
option displays the Windows Media applet. Refer to
for details.
DataWedge
DataWedge is a mobile device application that allows any application to receive data from barcode, RFID, magnetic stripe and serial devices.
Refer to
for pointers to detailed documentation.
Phone
• Scroll to and highlight the
Phone
option to learn if you’ve missed any calls.
• Tap the stylus on the highlighted
Phone
option to display the phone console.
Refer to
“The Phone” on page 3-4 for details about using the phone.
Voicemail
Highlighting
Voicemail
lets you know if you have any new voice messages. Tapping the stylus on this option displays the phone console so that you can dial the phone number to access your voice messages.
If your service supports voicemail but it has not been set up:
• Tap on
Voicemail
in the
Today
screen.
• Type your
voicemail number
.
Time, Date and Alarms
• Tap on
Start>Alarms
icon to display
Clock & Alarms
screen.
2 - 18 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Setting the Alarm
You can set a maximum of three alarms.
• In the
Alarms
tab, tap on the
Time
or
Day
in the
Clock & Alarms
screen. An
Alarm Settings
screen is displayed.
• To set the time,
highlight
the
hours
and then the
minutes
in the clock and use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the numbers, or type the hours and minutes directly from the keyboard or soft keyboard.
• Type a description in the
Description
field.
• Tap on the
day
on which you want the alarm to go off –
Sunday
through
Saturday
.
• Next, choose the
Sound
- you can tap on the
Play
button to experiment with the sounds. You can also choose
No Sound
.
• In the drop-down menu below the
Play
button, you can choose how the alarm will behave, whether or not it will repeat and so on.
• Tap on
OK
to save your changes.
Setting the Time and Date
To set the time on the Workabout Pro4:
• If it is not already displayed, tap on the
Time
tab at the top of the screen.
• Choose the appropriate
Time Zone
, set the
Date
, and the current
Time
.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 19
Text Messages
In the
Today
screen, highlighting
Text
lets you know if you have any new text messages. Tapping the stylus on this option displays the
Text Messages
screen.
Menu softkey
To compose and send a text message on your Workabout Pro4:
• Tap on the
Menu
softkey, and choose
New
from the menu.
• In the
To
field, type the
name
of the person to whom you want to send a text message,
or
to insert a number from your contacts list, tap on
Menu>Add Recipient
, and choose a name.
• Tap your stylus in the
message area
, and type your message.
• Tap on the
Send
softkey to deliver your message.
Send softkey
Once you send the message, your message is displayed in the Inbox and a
conversation
icon is displayed in the softkey bar.
Highlighting the text message and tapping on the conversation softkey automatically connects to the sender’s information so you can compose a reply.
2 - 20 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
E-mail Notification
If you have any e-mail, highlighting this option lets you know if you have any unread e-mail. To view e-mail:
• Tap on the
option in the
Today
screen, or tap on
Start
followed by the
icon to launch your e-mail.
NOTE
Refer to “Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS)” on page 3-9
and “Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or
for details about synchronizing your e-mail.
Calendar of Upcoming Appointments
This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments, meetings and so on in the weeks, months and years ahead.
NOTE
You can synchronize the Calendar so that any meetings, appointments and so on are displayed on your Workabout Pro4 Today screen as well as on your PC.
Refer to “Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS)” on page 3-9
and “Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or
for details about synchronizing your e-mail.
• In the
Today
screen, tap on
Calendar
, or tap on
Start>Calendar
icon to display the calendar applet.
Calendar softkey
Menu softkey
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 21
The default calendar displays any scheduled appointments. To choose the format of your calendar:
• Tap on the
Calendar
softkey – this key scrolls through the calendar formats.
Menu softkey
Creating and Editing Appointments
• In the
Calendar
screen, tap on the
Menu
softkey in the softkey bar, and then tap on
New Appointment
.
Figure 2-3
Appointment Detail Screen
• In the
Subject
field, name the appointment.
• Complete the remaining fields to reflect your appointment details.
Adding Reminders
If you want to be reminded in advance of an appointment:
• Tap on the
Reminder
field, and choose
Remind me
from the drop-down menu.
• Tap the field below the
Reminder
field, and tap on the number in the field to display a drop-down menu where you can define a numeric value of 1, 5, 10, 15, 30. Tap on
minute(s)
to display a drop-down menu from which you can choose the time unit for your reminder – minute(s), hour(s), day(s) or week(s).
• Tap
OK
to finish. You are returned to the view you were in before adding the reminder.
• Tap the appointment in the
Calendar
screen to display it in a
summary
screen. The reminder is indicated by the small, bell icon.
• If you’ve no further additions for the appointment, tap on
OK
. Otherwise, move to the
Categories
section following.
2 - 22 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Using Categories
Categories help you organize and track the different types of data you keep on your Workabout Pro4.
To assign an appointment to a category:
• Tap on the
Menu
softkey, and choose
Edit
.
The
Appointment
tab is displayed.
• Scroll down to the
Categories
field, and tap on it to display your options.
New category softkey
• Tap in the
checkbox next to the category
to which you want to assign the appointment.
• Tap
OK
. Your appointment is assigned to the category or categories you chose.
NOTE
You can create a new category by tapping on the
New
softkey at the bottom of the screen.
Attendees
This option allows you to define required and optional attendees for your meeting. When you tap on this option, your contacts are displayed where you can choose attendees.
Status
Tapping on
Status
lists your availability -
Free, Tentative, Busy
, or
Out of Office
.
Sensitivity
This option allows you to indicate the nature of the appointment –
Normal, Personal, Private,
or
Confidential
.
Deleting Appointments
• Tap and hold the stylus on the
appointment
you want to delete, and tap on
Delete Appointment
.
Favorites
The
Favorites
option connects you to Internet favourites. Tap and drag your stylus on this option, and choose
Add/Remove
to edit your list of favourites.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 23
Using the Navigation Bar and Hotkeys
The
navigation bar
along the top of the screen provides access to icons or hotkeys that, when tapped, provide shortcuts to associated apps.
Navigation bar
Tap anywhere in the navigation bar to display the hotkeys.
Hotkeys
Tap and drag the stylus to the left to display additional hotkeys.
Tap on a hotkey to display the associated app.
Shift-State Indicator Icon
The navigation bar at the top of the screen can also display the shift-state indicator icon. This icon indicates active modifier keys – [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [SYM] and [BLUE/FN].
Shift-state indicator icon
When a modifier key is pressed, it is displayed in the
shift-state indicator
icon. In the example above, the
[BLUE/FN] key was activated.
To distinguish a ‘locked’ modifier key – a key that has been locked ‘on’ – from a modifier key that is only active until the next key is pressed, ‘locked’ keys are encircled in a black frame in the
shift-state indicator
icon. Refer to
“Activating Modifier Keys” on page 2-6 for details.
2 - 24 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
The Softkey Bar
The Workabout Pro4 is equipped with a
softkey bar
at the bottom of the screen. It displays
softkeys
that allow you to access menus and commands. Note that the softkeys change to reflect the program with which you are working. It also displays the
soft keyboard
icon.
Soft keyboard icon
Soft keyboard
Softkey Bar
Softkeys
Softkeys
Tapping on a softkey displays information associated with the softkey – for example, in the sample screen above, the
Menu
softkey displays the commands associated with Word Mobile. The
View
softkey allows you to tailor how the Word document will be displayed.
The Soft Keyboard Icon
Tapping on the
soft keyboard
icon displays an onscreen keyboard you can use as an alternative to the Workabout Pro4 keyboard.
The Start Button
The
Start
button provides access to a screen of applets available on your Workabout Pro4.
• Tap on the
Start
button in the lower-left corner of the
softkey bar
to display your programs.
Managing Files and Folders
Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible with
File
Explorer
. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop PC.
• Tap on the
Start
button.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 25
• Use the stylus to scroll to the
File Explorer
icon.
• Tap on the icon to display the
File Explorer
screen.
Tap to display sorting options
Files stored here automatically
Tap to display additional storage/files
Creating a New Folder
• Tap
Start>File Explorer
.
• Tap the
Menu
softkey, and in the pop-up menu, choose
New Folder
.
• Use the Workabout Pro4 keyboard or the soft keyboard to assign a name to the folder.
Renaming, Copying, and Deleting a File
• To access any of these functions, press and hold the stylus on the file you want to work with. A ring of dots is displayed followed by a pop- up menu.
• Choose the appropriate command from the menu.
2 - 26 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Using Menus
In Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5, the menu is located in the
softkey bar
at the bottom of the screen.
Softkey Bar
Menu softkey
To execute a command:
• Tap on
Menu
to display the commands associated with it, and then tap on the command you want to execute.
Pop-Up Menus
Pop-up menus are available in many screens and programs. They offer quick access to a group of useful commands in addition to those available in the menu bar. To display a pop-up menu:
• Gently press and hold the stylus on the screen. A ring of dots is displayed on the screen followed by a pop-up menu.
• Tap on the
command
you want to execute.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 27
Programs – Using Applications
• Tap the
Start
button in the softkey bar to display the programs installed on your Workabout Pro4.
Figure 2-4
Program Icons
Opening an Application
• Tap on a the
Program
icon to launch the associated program.
Minimizing an Application
• Tap on the
X
button in the lower-right corner of an application screen to minimize the application.
NOTE
Although it looks like a Close button, this button does
not
close the application – it only minimizes it.
Opening, Closing and Switching Applications
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
icon. Use your stylus to scroll to the
Task Manager
icon.
• Tap on
Task Manager
to display the associated screen.
The
Task Manager
screen lists all running tasks (applications). This applet provides a number of options to manage your opened applications.
•
End Task:
To shut down an application,
highlight the program
in the list, and tap on the
End Task
softkey in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.
•
End All Tasks:
To shut down
all
applications, tap on the
Menu
softkey, and choose
End All Tasks
.
•
Switch To:
To make an application listed in this screen active, highlight the application, and tap on
Menu>Switch To
.
For additional information about the
Task Manager
, refer to “Task Manager” on page 4-76 .
2 - 28 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Settings
• Tap
Start
followed by the
Settings
icon to display the setting options for your Workabout Pro4.
Figure 2-5
Settings Icons
Along with icons that provide information about your unit and allow you to adjust the appearance and behaviour of your Workabout Pro4, an additional group of icons is stored in three folders –
Personal, System
and
Connections
. Refer to Chapter 4: “Settings”
for details about the options available to you.
Kiosk
Kiosk
allows the administrator to tailor how the Workabout Pro4 operates and the options the user can access.
Note that the look of the
Today
screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items that is best accessed using a stylus.
IMPORTANT
For details about this application, refer to
.
Data Transfer Between Workabout Pro4 and a PC
Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC.
For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier, Microsoft
®
ActiveSync
®
connectivity software can be used to connect your Workabout Pro4 to a PC.
If the Windows Vista
®
, Windows 7 or later, operating system is installed in your PC, ActiveSync is not required to transfer data between your Workabout Pro4 and your PC. You do need to install the Windows Mobile
Device Center.
By using a Single Bay USB Cradle with your Workabout Pro4, you can connect to a PC with a cable and:
• View Workabout Pro4 files from Windows Explorer.
• Drag and drop files between Workabout Pro4 and the PC in the same way that you would between
PC drives.
• Back up Workabout Pro4 files to the PC, restore them from the PC to the hand-held again, etc.
Getting to Know Your Workabout Pro4 2 - 29
Uploading Data in a Single Bay USB Cradle
The Single Bay USB Cradle allows the hand-held to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available. When Workabout Pro4 is properly inserted in a docking cradle, a cradle icon is displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen.
Using Microsoft ActiveSync
NOTE
If you use a serial port to connect devices like Workabout Pro4 to your desktop computer, the connection may not succeed because ActiveSync has trouble connecting at non-default baud rates.
To work around this problem, set the ActiveSync baud rate on the desktop to use the same baud rate as the device. You can set the baud rate by editing the registry on the desktop host computer, as detailed in the steps outlined at the following website: http://support.microsoft.com/kb/324466
To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the program’s setup wizard. For details, go to the following website and type
ActiveSync
into the search box: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx
Using Windows Mobile Device Center
If you are running
Windows Vista
,
Windows 7,
or later, your data transfers do not require ActiveSync.
Instead, you will need to download
Windows Mobile Device Center
. For instructions, go to the following website and type the name into the search box: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/en/default.aspx
To transfer data between your PC and your hand-held:
• Tap on
Start>Computer
to display the drives. Workabout Pro4 will be visible here.
• Open drives, files and folders as you would on your PC.
General Maintenance
Caring for the Touchscreen
The touchscreen is covered with a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside.
The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating. The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
• mustard, ketchup
• sodium hydroxide
• concentrated caustic solutions
• benzyl alcohol
• concentrated acids
2 - 30 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable screen protector (WA6113).
These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.
Do not to expose the touchscreen to direct sunlight for prolonged periods of time. If this is unavoidable, use a
UV screen protector to extend the life of the screen.
Cleaning the Workabout Pro4
IMPORTANT
Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean.
To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only your finger or the stylus (pen) supplied with your Workabout Pro4.
• Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand-held unit.
• Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning. The Workabout Pro4 has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals. The plastic is partially soluble in oils, mineral spirits, aircraft de-icing fluid, and gasoline. The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions.
• Exposure to aircraft de-icing fluids can degrade the plastics on the Workabout Pro4. If the Workabout Pro4 is used near aircraft de-icing environments, regular rinsing with water is recommended.
• To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.
CHAPTER 3 PROGRAMS
The Onscreen Phone Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Sending & Ending Phone Calls Using the Onscreen Phone Keypad . . . . . . .3-4
Sending & Ending Calls Using the Workabout Pro4 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Making a Conference Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Programming Speed Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Managing Phone Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Changing Synchronization Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7) . . . . . . . 3-11
Sending an E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Working with the Contacts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Communicate Tab - Adding Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Notes Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Browsing Web Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Using the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Moving Photos to the Workabout Pro4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Opening a Photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3
3 - 2 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Creating a Slide Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Using the Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Creating a Note Using the Soft Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Creating and Converting Handwritten Notes to Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Renaming a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Recording Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Synchronization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Creating an Internet Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Using Internet Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Excel Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
OneNote Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Word Mobile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Text Input Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
Sharing Documents with your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36
PowerPoint Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
SharePoint Workspace Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Connecting to a Terminal Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Disconnecting Without Ending a Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Ending a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Programs 3 - 3
Programs
Workabout Pro4 programs are all available from the
Start
screen.
• Tap on the
Start
button in the lower-left corner of the
Today
screen to display the
Start
screen.
Tapping on an icon in this screen launches the associated applet.
IMPORTANT
For details about the options contained under the ‘Settings’ icon, refer to
.
Home
Tapping on the
Home
icon in the
Start
screen displays the
Today
screen.
IMPORTANT
For details about the Today screen, refer to
“The Today Screen” on page 2-15 .
3 - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
The Phone
The Workabout Pro4 can be equipped with optional phone capabilities.
IMPORTANT
In the Americas the Workabout Pro4 is not approved to be used with any VoIP application using Wide Area Network (WAN) or Wireless
Local Area Network (WLAN).
NOTE
The Phone option is only available on units equipped with the Cinterion PHS8-P
GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio.
To access the phone pad on a unit that includes the phone option:
• Tap on
Start>Phone
icon.
The Onscreen Phone Keypad
The
onscreen phone keypad
provides phone services like those you may find on your cellular phone. You can use the phone keypad provided with your Workabout Pro4 to, for example, send and receive phone calls, make conference calls, view your call history, set up speed dial numbers, etc.
Sending & Ending Phone Calls Using the Onscreen Phone Keypad
To display the onscreen phone keypad:
• Tap on
Start>Phone
icon.
NOTE
You can also press the [Talk] key on the Workabout Pro4 keyboard to display the phone keypad providing it has been activated. The [Talk] key is labelled with a green telephone receiver icon.
Programs 3 - 5
Phone settings
Directory assistance
Hide/show keypad Menu
To make a phone call:
• Use the phone keypad to enter the phone number. Tap on
[Talk]
to connect the call.
When you tap on the [Talk] button to connect to a phone number, the [Talk] button toggles to become the [End] button. When you’ve completed your call and want to disconnect:
• Tap on
[End]
button on the onscreen phone keypad.
Sending & Ending Calls Using the Workabout Pro4 Keyboard
Units equipped with a WWAN radio can be ordered with a phone option – the keyboard provides a [Talk] and an [End] key on the physical keyboard.
• Press the [Talk] key to answer a call or to display the onscreen phone keypad so you can initiate a call.
• Press the [End] key to terminate a phone call.
Making a Conference Call
To set up a conference call between yourself and two or more other parties:
• In the phone keypad, type the
first phone number
. Tap on
[Talk]
.
• While you are connected to the
first number
, tap on
Menu>Hold
.
• Type the
second number
. Tap on
[Talk]
.
• Tap on
Menu>Conference
.
• To add another party, tap on
Menu>Hold
, type the
number
, and then tap
Menu>Conference
.
• Tap on
[End]
to disconnect all calls.
Programming Speed Dial
The phone keypad provides a
Speed Dial
button for quick access to frequently used numbers.
• In the phone keypad, tap on the
Speed Dial
button to display the
speed dial Phone
dialog box.
3 - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Speed dial number
Call softkey
This dialog box lists the phone numbers and the speed dial key to which the phone number has been assigned.
• Tap on the
Speed Dial Number
(the number to the left of the phone number you want to dial),
or
Tap on the
Call
softkey in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen; the number is dialled for you.
Using the Phone Keypad to Program a Speed Dial
There are a number of ways to add a speed dial number. You can create a speed dial number using the
Contacts
list or by using the
Speed Dial
button on the phone keypad.
Adding a New Phone Number
• In the
phone keypad
, tap on the
Speed Dial
button.
• In the speed dial
Phone
dialog box, tap on
Menu>New
.
• In the list, choose a
contact
for a speed dial.
Programs 3 - 7
• Type a contact name in the field where the cursor is displayed, or tap on a name in the list.
A sequential speed dial key is automatically assigned in the
Location
field. You can tap on the arrows to the right of the
Location
field to change the auto assignment.
Using the Contact List to Program a Speed Dial
• Tap on
Start
followed by the
Contacts
icon.
• Tap on the
Contact
to which you want to assign a speed dial number.
• In the
Summary
screen, tap on
Menu>Add to Speed Dial
.
3 - 8 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Managing Phone Settings
You can adjust phone settings such as the ring type and tone, choose phone services such as barring calls, and you can also determine network selections.
IMPORTANT
For details, refer to “The Phone – Managing Settings” on page 4-44 .
Text Messages
Tapping on the
Text
option in the
Today
screen displays this screen.
This option allows you to compose, send and receive text messages using your Workabout Pro4.
IMPORTANT
For details about using the Text Messages feature, refer to
Programs 3 - 9
NOTE
If your e-mail is already synchronized, go to
“Sending an E-mail” on page 3-12 .
The
program is used to send and receive e-mail on your Workabout Pro4. It also provides access to text messages.
To send and receive e-mail, you’ll need to synchronize your PC or connect to a Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol 4 (IMAP4) mail server.
For each of these methods, you need to set up an e-mail account with one exception – Outlook e-mail accounts are set up by default.
Folders
If you use an Outlook e-mail account, messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically synchronized with your Workabout Pro4. You can use ActiveSync on your PC to synchronize additional folders. The folders and messages you move are mirrored on the server.
For POP3 accounts, if you move e-mail messages to a folder you create, the link between the messages on the Workabout Pro4 and the copies on the mail server are broken. When you next connect, the mail server will recognize that the messages are missing from the Workabout Pro4 Inbox folder and delete them from the server, preventing duplication of messages. Keep in mind however that you will not have further access to messages that you moved to folders from anywhere except with the Workabout Pro4.
For IMAP4 accounts, the folders you create and the messages you move are reflected on the server, making messages available any time whether you connect to your mail server from your Workabout Pro4 or your PC.
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS)
IMPORTANT
For PCs running Windows Vista or Windows 7, follow the guidelines
under “Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or
By synchronizing the Workabout Pro4
program with Outlook on your PC, your e-mail is available on both the Workabout Pro4 and on your PC.
3 - 10 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
NOTE
Synchronizing e-mail does not require that the Workabout Pro4 have an independent connection to the Internet.
• In
ActiveSync
on your PC, tap on
Tools>Options
in the tool bar at the top of the screen.
• Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to
. Tap on
OK
.
Once you check
for synchronization, Outlook e-mail messages are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. The next time you synchronize with ActiveSync, the e-mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on your Workabout Pro4.
Changing Synchronization Settings
• In
ActiveSync
on your PC, double-tap the
item in the
Sync Options
tab.
Programs 3 - 11
• Tap on the
Select Folder
button.
• Add a check mark next to the folders in this screen that you want to synchronize with your Workabout
Pro4, and tap on OK.
The
E-mail Synchronization
screen is displayed again.
• If you want to accept file attachments, add a check mark next to
Include file attachments
. To limit the size, tap on Only if smaller than, and specify a size in the KB box.
• Tap on
OK
.
Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7)
PCs running Windows Vista or Windows 7 use
Windows Mobile Device Center
in place of ActiveSync.
• In the
Windows Mobile Device Center
, tap on
Set up your device.
3 - 12 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Make certain that a check mark is displayed in the checkbox next to
. Tap on
Next
.
NOTE
If an Exchange Server is detected, a screen is displayed where you can enter the Server address, your user name and so on, and sync the Workabout Pro4 with the Exchange Server directly over a cellular or wireless network when you are not connected to your PC. This is an optional step that you can skip.
• Tap on
Skip
and then tap on
Setup
.
When
is checked for synchronization, Outlook e-mail messages are synchronized as part of the general synchronization process. The next time you synchronize with Windows Mobile Center, the e-mail in Outlook on your PC will be transferred to the Messaging program on your Workabout Pro4.
Sending an E-mail
E-mail messages are stored in the Outbox folder and are sent to recipients the next time you sync or connect to your e-mail server to send and receive mail.
• Tap on
Start>E-mail
.
• Choose the e-mail account you want to use.
• Tap on
Menu>New
.
• In the
To, Cc
, or
Bcc
fields, enter an
e-mail address.
Keep in mind that you can also use your
Contacts
to choose an e-mail recipient provided an e-mail address is associated with the contact.
• Tap
Menu>Add Recipient
, and then choose a
contact
from the list.
• If you're sending an email to
multiple
people, use a
semicolon
(;) between addresses.
Programs 3 - 13
Contacts
Contacts
are available with your e-mail, text messages, voice messages and your phone.
• Tap on
Start>Contacts
to display your contacts.
Working with the Contacts List
The
Contacts
screen allows you to work with existing entries, search for a particular contact and create new entries.
Contact Menu Commands
A
Menu
softkey at the bottom of the screen provides additional commands that allow you to work with the contacts in this list.
Menu
3 - 14 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Searching for a Contact
Type a contact name here
Tap on an alpha group to narrow the search
To search for a particular entry:
• Tap on the
Enter a name ...
field, and type the name you are searching for in the Contacts list.
• To narrow your search to names beginning with a particular letter, tap on the appropriate alpha character grouping.
Communicate Tab - Adding Contacts
Adding a New Contact
The
New
softkey located to the right of the
Start
softkey allows you to add additional entries to your contacts list.
• Tap on the
New
softkey.
New
• Choose the
contact type
to which you want to add an entry.
• Tap on the
Select
button to display the
Communicate
screen. Tap on each of the options you want to complete for the new contact you are creating. Each item you tap on in this screen produces an associated pop-up screen in which you can enter the appropriate information. For example, in the sample screen following, tapping on
Add a name
displays an associated screen for you to complete.
Programs 3 - 15
• When you’ve completed the information for the contact entry, tap on
OK
. The new contact is displayed in the
Contacts
list.
Info Tab
This tab allows you define a ring tone for a particular contact. You can also add additional addresses related to your contact (work and home), and information about your contact such as a job title, office location and fax number.
Notes Tab
This screen allows you to enter useful information about your contact.
3 - 16 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Internet Explorer
You can connect to
Internet Explorer
in two ways: by connecting the Workabout Pro4 directly to the Internet or
by connecting through your PC (see “ActiveSync®” on page 3-28 ).
Browsing Web Sites
There is little difference between the standard Internet Explorer found on your PC and that found on your
Workabout Pro4, sometimes referred to as
Pocket Internet Explorer
. You can enter URLs, set a ‘home page’, turn images on and off, e-mail links to friends, and so on.
To go to a web site:
•
Connecting to the Internet” on page 4-21 ).
• Tap on
Start>Internet Explorer
to open
Internet Explorer
.
• Tap on the address bar – the field near the top of the screen where URLs are entered – to highlight the current URL.
• Type a new URL in the address bar.
Tapping on the
softkeys
in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen displays
Internet Explorer
commands like those you find on your PC.
Programs 3 - 17
Calendar
This option is used to map out all your upcoming appointments, meetings and so on in the weeks, months and years ahead.
IMPORTANT
Refer to
“Calendar of Upcoming Appointments” on page 2-20 for
details about this feature.
Alarms
Refer to
“Time, Date and Alarms” on page 2-17
for details about this applet.
Pictures & Videos
The
Pictures & Videos
applet allows you to snap photographs and record video footage. It is also a photo and video viewing program.
IMPORTANT
The Pictures & Videos program can only display .bmp or .jpg formats. Photos in other formats will need to be converted on your PC before they are transferred to the Workabout Pro4.
3 - 18 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Using the Camera
• Tap on
Start>Pictures & Videos
.
Keep in mind that if there are no pictures stored on your Workabout Pro4 as yet, you’ll only see the
Camera
icon in this screen.
• Tap on the
Camera icon
to activate the camera.
The screen will display the image your camera is pointed at. (The camera is built into the back of the Workabout Pro4.)
Photo Film Icon indicates the camera is active.
Tapping on this softkey displays thumbnails of photos stored on the Workabout Pro4.
• Frame the image in the Workabout Pro4 screen. Press
[ENTER]
to snap the photograph.
Programs 3 - 19
Photo Menu
When the camera is activated, tapping on
Menu
displays a set of commands to help you modify how your camera operates, the quality of the photos it takes, and so on. You can also use this menu to activate the video recorder rather than the still camera.
NOTE
‘Video’ is a toggle command. When the ‘Still’ camera is activated, ‘Video’ is available in this menu. When the video recorder is activated, ‘Still’ (camera) is available in this menu.
Moving Photos to the Workabout Pro4
• Connect your device to your PC with ActiveSync.
• Locate the pictures on your PC, and drag photos from their folder to the
Mobile Device
(Workabout Pro4).
The Workabout Pro4 can be found under
Computer
(
My Computer
on PCs running Windows XP).
Opening a Photo
• To open a photo, tap on
Start>Pictures & Videos
. You’ll see a thumbnail of your photos.
• Tap on a thumbnail to open the photo.
NOTE
If you’ve stored your photos on a storage card, you’ll need to tap on the storage card icon to display your photos.
Deleting a Photo
• Press and hold the stylus on the thumbnail photo you want to delete to display a pop-up menu. Tap on
Delete
.
• Confirm your choice when prompted.
3 - 20 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Editing a Photo
• Tap on a thumbnail photo to open it.
• Tap on
Menu>Edit
.
The
Rotate
command is now displayed in the softkey bar. Additional editing tools are listed in the
Menu
.
Creating a Slide Show
To view a slide show:
• Tap on the
Menu>Play Slide Show
.
The slide show begins – in slide show mode, photos are displayed for about five seconds, one after the other.
• To display the slide show tool bar, tap anywhere on the photo.
Flip View
Pause
Play
Previous
Next
Close
Using the Video Recorder
• Tap on the
Camera
icon.
• In the bottom-right corner of the
camera
screen, tap on
Menu>Video
.
Programs 3 - 21
• Press
[ENTER]
to begin recording.
Video Recorder Icon
Indicates that video is active.
• To end the video, press
[ENTER]
again, or tap on the
Stop
softkey.
NOTE
When the ‘Video’ recorder is activated, a Menu is available to tailor the operation of the recorder, the quality of the recording, and so on.
Windows Media
Windows Media
allows you to play music and videos on your Workabout Pro4. You can use
Windows Media
to play digital audio and video files that are stored on your Workabout Pro4 or on the web.
• To work with this applet, tap on
Start>Windows Media
.
For details about using this applet, refer to: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsphone/en-us/howto/wp6/music/windows-media-player-mobile.aspx
Messenger (Windows Live)
Windows Live Messenger
is an instant messaging service. Refer to the Microsoft web site for details.
3 - 22 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Windows Live
Windows Live
is a free online service that provides operators with a free mobile phone back-up solution by wirelessly synchronizing contacts, calendar appointments, and so on with a password-protected online portal.
When you tap on
Windows Live
and accept the license agreement, a
Setup
screen is displayed. Follow the setup steps to set up your
Windows Live ID
so that you can begin using this service.
Notes
The
Notes
application is an electronic notepad you can use to jot down your ideas quickly. You can enter text using the
soft keyboard
, the
Workabout Pro4 keyboard
, or you can create a handwritten note on the screen by using the
transcriber
. You can also
record
a message.
Notes can also be shared through e-mail and synchronization with your PC.
• Tap on
Start>Notes
to launch this application.
New
• Tap on the
New
softkey to display a blank note.
Programs 3 - 23
Creating a Note Using the Soft Keyboard
The
soft keyboard icon
is available by default. It is a replica of a standard keyboard. Use your stylus to type letters, numbers, symbols and so on.
• When you’ve completed your note, tap on
OK
.
Your note is automatically saved. The file name is the first line of the note if you used the keyboard – otherwise, it’s named Note1, Note2 and so on.
Creating and Converting Handwritten Notes to Text
To create a handwritten note using the
transcriber
:
• Tap and hold the stylus on the
soft keyboard
icon to display the pop-up menu.
• Choose
Transcriber
from the menu.
When you choose
Transcriber
, you can write notes in your own handwriting. Workabout Pro4 converts the notes into typed text for you.
3 - 24 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
A
Transcriber Intro
screen is displayed to provide information to help you work with the
Transcriber
.
When you choose
Transcriber
, the soft keyboard icon changes to an icon of a hand poised to write a note.
• At the
top
of the
Transcriber Intro
screen, tap on
OK
.
• In the blank
Note
screen, use your stylus to write a note as clearly as possible.
The text in the note is converted from handwritten to printed text.
Renaming a Note
• Press and hold the stylus on the file name in the
Notes
screen that you want to rename. In the pop-up menu, choose
Rename/Move
.
• In the
Name
field, type the new name.
NOTE
Remember that if you want to use the soft keyboard to type a new name, you’ll need to tap and hold the stylus on the
Transcriber icon
, and choose
Keyboard
from the popup menu.
You can also move the note to a new
Folder
and/or a new
Location
.
• When you’ve made the changes you need, tap on
OK
.
Recording Notes
It is sometimes easier to record a note than to write it down just to make certain that you’ve captured an idea before it drifts away. To make an audio recording:
• Tap on the
New
softkey to open a fresh note.
Programs 3 - 25
• Tap on
Menu>View Recording Toolbar
.
Volume
Skip to end
Skip to start
Record
Stop
Play
• Tap on the
Record
button – a beep alerts you that your device is now ready to record.
• Begin speaking into the microphone on the Workabout Pro4. Make certain that you move the Workabout
Pro4 to within a few feet of the source of the sound you want to record.
• Tap on the
Stop
button when you’ve completed your recording.
• Tap on
OK
to save the recorded note.
A speaker icon is displayed in the note indicating the presence of a recording within the note.
• To play the recorded note, tap on the
speaker icon
.
• Tap on
Menu
, and choose
View Recording Toolbar
again to turn off the feature.
Task Notification
Tasks
lets you create lists of entries representing your responsibilities, upcoming projects, and so on. If you’ve assigned any tasks, this option lets you know how many active tasks you have.
NOTE
You can synchronize the Task Notification option so that any tasks are displayed on your Workabout Pro4 as well as your PC. Refer to
Outlook (PC with Windows XP OS)” on page 3-9
and “Synchronizing E-mail with
Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7)” on page 3-11 . Each section out-
lines how to synchronize options other than e-mail.
3 - 26 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Tap on
Start>Tasks
to display the Tasks screen.
Creating a Task
• Tap in the field labelled
Tap here to add a new task
.
• Type your task description.
• Press
[ENTER]
to add the task to your list.
Edit
Programs 3 - 27
Editing a Task
• Tap on a
task
in the task you want to edit. Tap on the
Edit
softkey in the softkey bar to display a detailed task screen where you can define task characteristics.
Figure 3-1
Task Details Screen
Each of the nine items in this screen, when tapped, displays a drop-down menu where you can choose from a list of options.
• Once you’ve completed all the appropriate fields, tap on
OK
to save your changes.
NOTE
You can also tap on the Notes tab to add additional information about the task you are defining.
Deleting a Task
• Press and hold the stylus on a task until a pop-up menu is displayed.
• Tap on
Delete Task
.
Marking a Task as Completed
• In the
Tasks
list, tap the
checkbox
next to the items that are completed.
Sorting Tasks
• Tap on the
Menu
softkey, and tap on
Sort By
.
You can choose from
Status, Priority, Subject, Start Date
or
Due Date
. The tasks are arranged in the list according to the criterion you chose.
Limiting the Tasks Displayed in the Task Screen
• Tap on
Menu
in the softkey bar, and tap on
Filter
.
You can choose
All Tasks, Recently Viewed, No Categories, Active Tasks
or
Completed Tasks
. The tasks are displayed on the screen according to the preference you chose.
3 - 28 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
File Explorer
Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5 files are stored in folders and sub-folders that are accessible through
File Explorer
. You can open, save, rename, copy and paste files in the same manner as you would on any desktop PC.
IMPORTANT
Refer to
“Managing Files and Folders” on page 2-24
for details about this feature.
ActiveSync®
ActiveSync®
is Microsoft PC connectivity software that can be used to connect the Workabout Pro4 to PCs running this software. You can synchronize the Workabout Pro4 with your PC using this utility.
By connecting the Workabout Pro4 to a PC through your single bay USB cradle and running ActiveSync or
Mobile Device Center on your PC, you can view Workabout Pro4 files, drag and drop files between the Workabout Pro4 and the PC, connect to the Internet, and so on.
Synchronization
IMPORTANT
For information about using ActiveSync and Mobile Device Center on
your PC, refer to “Synchronizing E-mail with Outlook (PC with
and “Synchronizing E-mail with
Outlook (PC with Windows Vista or Windows 7)” on page 3-11 .
To download either ActiveSync or Mobile Device Center, visit the following Microsoft internet site: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsphone/en-gb/howto/wp6/sync/prepare-to-sync-windows-phone-6-5-with-my-computer.aspx
Programs 3 - 29
Internet Sharing
This option allows you to use your Workabout Pro4 to connect your PC to the Internet. Before you can use
Internet Sharing
, you must make certain that you have established a data connection on your Workabout Pro4.
Creating an Internet Connection
Follow the steps in this section only if you have not already setup an Internet connection.
You’ll need the following information before you begin:
From your cellular service provider:
data connectivity information, access point name and PAP/CHAP security settings.
From your Internet service provider (ISP) or wireless service provider:
access point name and password and any additional security information.
For a GPRS, 1xRTT or dialup connection:
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections
. Tap on the
Connections
icon.
• Under
My Work Network
, tap
Add a new modem connection
.
• Type a
name
for the connection, and choose
Cellular Line (GPRS)
, or for 1xRTT connections, choose
Cellular Line
. Tap on
Next
.
• Type the
phone number
or
access point name
provided by your service provider, and tap
Next
.
• Type the
credentials
supplied by your service provider, and tap
Finish
.
Using Internet Sharing
NOTE
Make certain that your data connection is running and that you can access the Internet from the Workabout Pro4. If you are using a USB cable to connect to your PC, you will need to disable the ActiveSync USB connection.
• On your PC, open the
ActiveSync
window, and tap on
File>Connection Settings.
If you are using
Windows Mobile Device Center
, tap on
Mobile Device Settings>Connection Settings
.
• Disable
Allow USB connection
by tapping in the checkbox to the left of this option.
• Connect the Workabout Pro4 to your PC using
Bluetooth
or a
USB cable
.
• On your Workabout Pro4, tap
Start>Internet Sharing
.
• Choose the
PC Connection
type – USB or Bluetooth.
• Choose the
network connection
that the Workabout Pro4 should use to connect to the Internet.
• Tap
Connect
. It takes approximately 30 seconds to establish a connection. (If you are prompted to turn on
Bluetooth
, tap
Yes
.)
For PC Running Windows XP or Earlier
If you are using a
Bluetooth
connection, execute the following steps
on your PC
:
• Tap
Start>Control Panel>Network Connections
.
3 - 30 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Right-click on
Bluetooth Network Connections
, and click on
Bluetooth Network Devices.
• If the Workabout Pro4 is listed as a
Network Access Point
, choose
Connect
. If it is not listed, choose
Create a new connection
and use the
New Connection Wizard
to add the Workabout Pro4 to the list.
For PC Running Windows Vista or Windows 7
If you are using a
Bluetooth
connection, execute the following steps
on your PC
:
• Tap
Start>Control Panel>Network & Sharing Center
.
• Double-tap on
Set up a new connection or network
.
• In the
Choose a connection option
screen, double-click on
Connect to a Bluetooth personal area network (PAN)
.
A
Devices and Printers
screen is displayed.
NOTE
Make certain that
Bluetooth
is enabled on your Workabout Pro4 and that it is discoverable – on your Workabout Pro4, tap on
Start>Settings>Connections
. Tap on the
Bluetooth
icon. Scroll to the
Mode
tab. If they are not already enabled, tap in the checkbox (add an ‘
x
’) next to
Turn on
Bluetooth
and
Discoverable
.
• In the
Devices and Printers
screen, tap on the
Add a device
button.
Your Workabout Pro4 is displayed in the
Add a device
screen.
• Double-tap on your
Workabout Pro4
icon.
You are asked to choose a pairing option –
Create a pairing code for me
, or
Enter the device’s pairing code
.
• If a pairing code has been assigned to your Workabout Pro4, choose
Enter the device’s pairing code
, and type the
Workabout Pro4 passcode
on your PC
and
on your Workabout Pro4.
• If a pairing code has not been assigned to your Workabout Pro4, choose
Create a pairing code for me
, and type the
Workabout Pro4 passcode
on your PC
and
on your Workabout Pro4.
A message will appear on your Workabout Pro4 indicating that you have successfully paired your Workabout
Pro4 with your PC. Your Workabout Pro4 will appear in
Control Panel>Devices and Printers.
Task Manager
The
Task Manager
screen lists all running tasks (applications) or processes. This applet provides a number of options to manage these.
IMPORTANT
For details about using the Task Manager, refer to “Task Manager” on page 4-76
.
Search Phone
This feature allows you to conduct a search through the data stored on your phone.
• Tap on
Start>Search Phone
icon.
Programs 3 - 31
• Tap in the
Search For field
, and type the information or a fragment of the information for which you are searching.
• In the
Type:
drop-down menu, choose the location in which you want to conduct the search.
3 - 32 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Tap on the
Search
softkey key.
The results of your search are displayed in the
Search
screen.
Office Mobile
This icon contains the following abridged Microsoft programs:
Excel Mobile
,
OneNote Mobile
,
PowerPoint
Mobile
,
SharePoint Workspace Mobile
and
Word Mobile
.
• Tap on
Start>Office Mobile
.
Excel Mobile
Excel Mobile
is an abridged version of Microsoft Excel, an electronic spreadsheet program. If you’re familiar the Excel application on your PC, you’ll be able to navigate
Excel Mobile
.
In addition to providing the tools to manipulate text and numeric values like statistics, percentages, using formulas that perform calculations, and so on, this program can also include graphics such as pie charts.
Excel Mobile
allows you to copy Excel workbooks from your PC onto your Workabout Pro4 and update them while you’re away from your desk.
• Tap on
Start>Office Mobile>Excel Mobile
.
• If a list of workbooks is displayed rather than a new sheet, you’ll need to create a new workbook. To create a workbook:
• In
Excel Mobile
, tap the
Menu>File>New
.
OneNote Mobile
You can use
OneNote Mobile
to take notes wherever you are and then synchronize your notes with a notebook section in the OneNote version on your PC. For example, you can:
• Snap pictures of business cards on your Workabout Pro4 and then bring them into
OneNote
on your PC.
• Create short text notes and voice recordings on your Workabout Pro4 to remind you about important meetings, ideas, etc. and synchronize them with your notes.
• Prepare information in
OneNote
on your PC and then transfer it to your Workabout Pro4 where it will be available to you wherever you and your Workabout Pro4 go.
Programs 3 - 33
IMPORTANT
Remember that you must have Microsoft Office OneNote 2010 and the latest version of ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center installed on your PC before you can set up a partnership between your Workabout Pro4 and your PC.
Setting Up a Partnership
• Start
Office OneNote
and
ActiveSync
or
Windows Mobile Center
on your PC.
• Connect the Workabout Pro4 to your PC; you can use a USB cable or a
Bluetooth
connection.
When a connection is established between the Workabout Pro4 and your PC, ActiveSync displays a
New
Partnership
screen.
• Choose
Standard partnership
, and tap on
Next
.
• To share information between
OneNote Mobile
and
Office OneNote 2010
on your PC, tap
Synchronize with this desktop computer
, and then tap on
Next
.
• Tap on
Finish
to begin the partnership between the Workabout Pro4 and the PC. Now you’ll be able to pass notes back and forth between your PC and your Workabout Pro4.
Creating A Note
• Tap on
Start>OfficeMobile>OneNote Mobile
icon. Tap on
New
in the softkey bar to display a blank note.
• Tap on
New
to create a note page. Begin typing.
3 - 34 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• When you complete your note, tap on
Done
.
NOTE
Remember that you can tap on the Menu softkey to Undo typing, add Formats
(Bold, Italic, Underline, Strikethrough), and include Lists (Numbered, Bulleted,
Clear).
Using the OneNote Menu
Tapping on
Menu
displays a list of options to help you work with the
OneNote Mobile
applet.
•
Undo
,
Redo
,
Cut
,
Copy
and
Paste:
These commands operate in the same way as they do in any
Windows Office application.
•
Format:
Tapping on this command lists the formatting options you can apply to your note:
Bold
,
Italic
,
Underline
,
Strikethrough
and
Clear All
.
•
Take Picture:
When you tap on this option, the Workabout Pro4 switches to camera mode so that you can snap a picture to include in your note.
Programs 3 - 35
Press
[ENTER]
to snap a photo that is automatically inserted into your note.
•
Insert Picture:
Tapping on this command automatically displays your
My Pictures
folder where you can tap on an existing picture to insert it into your note.
•
Insert Recording:
When you tap on this command, a recording panel is displayed.
Play
Stop
Record
Cancel
Save
Tap on the
Record
button to
record
your message.
Tap on
Stop
when you’ve completed your message.
Tap on
Play
to
listen
to your voice message.
To
discard
your message, tap on
X
– the
Cancel
button.
3 - 36 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
To
save
your message, tap on
OK
. An audio icon is displayed in your note. You can tap on it to listen to your message.
Synchronizing Workabout Pro4 One Note With PC OneNote
• Connect the Workabout Pro4 to your PC using either a USB cable or
Bluetooth
.
When the connection is complete, take one of the following steps:
• In
Microsoft ActiveSync
on your
PC
, choose
Sync
or
• On your
Workabout Pro4
, tap on
Start>ActiveSync
, and then tap on
Sync
.
During synchronization, the notes you created on your Workabout Pro4 are copied to a new Office OneNote
2010 notebook called
OneNote Mobile
on your
PC
. When synchronization is done, you can drag the transferred notes into any other sections and other notebooks on your PC.
Word Mobile
If you’ve used Microsoft Word on your PC, Word Mobile will be familiar to you. Keep in mind however that
Word Mobile
is designed for a small screen and limited memory.
NOTE
Keep in mind also that a Word document created on your PC can lose key formatting features such as styles and tables if you make changes to it on your Workabout Pro4.
• Tap on
Start>Office Mobile>Word Mobile
.
NOTE
If you’ve already created a Word document, it will be listed in a Word Mobile window. To launch a new Word document, you’ll need to tap on the New softkey.
Text Input Modes
In addition to the soft keyboard, you can enter text using the
Workabout Pro4 keyboard
,
soft keyboard
or the
transcriber
.
IMPORTANT
Refer to
for details about the transcriber and soft keyboard text input methods.
Sharing Documents with your PC
Documents created on a PC are recognized by your Workabout Pro4. However, some formatting is lost when a
Word document is converted to a Word Mobile document. This loss also occurs when you open a
.doc
file and change it on the Workabout Pro4.
Programs 3 - 37
IMPORTANT
To avoid problems, work on copies of .doc files. In addition, keep in mind that you can use the Terminal Services Client program to log onto a desktop PC that is also running Terminal Services, and then you can use any program on your PC, including Microsoft Word
(rather than Word Mobile).
Refer to
“Remote Desktop Mobile” on page 3-38
.
PowerPoint Mobile
PowerPoint Mobile
works just like the desktop version that may be installed on your PC. To launch this program on your Workabout Pro4:
• Tap on
Start>Office Mobile>PowerPoint Mobile
.
SharePoint Workspace Mobile
SharePoint Workspace Mobile
allows you to open, edit, and save documents that are on a SharePoint site (a web site that lets you and others share and collaborate on documents, projects, schedules, and so on).
• Tap on
Start>Office Mobile>SharePoint Mobile
.
• Tap on the
Address
softkey to highlight the web address field. Type the
SharePoint address
you want to access.
• Tap on
Go
to access documents in the SharePoint site you specified.
NOTE
To access a SharePoint site using SharePoint Workspace Mobile from inside your organization, you need to set up a Wi-Fi connection that lets you access a
SharePoint site on your company's network.
PartnerUp
This app displays a number of pre-loaded applications. Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associated web site.
The operator can then install the application. If a license is required, it can be obtained by sending an e-mail to the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Rep from the contact web page.
http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/Pages/Contact_Us/
Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through Motorola.
3 - 38 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Kiosk
Kiosk
allows the administrator to tailor how the Workabout Pro4 operates and the options the user can access.
Note that the look of the
Today
screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items that is best accessed using a stylus.
IMPORTANT
For details about this application, refer to
.
Modem Link
Modem link allows you to use the GPRS connectivity on your phone to connect your laptop or PC to the Internet.
Remote Desktop Mobile
This program allows you to log onto a Windows Terminal Server and run the desktop programs from the server on your Workabout Pro4.
Connecting to a Terminal Server
• Tap on
Start>Remote Desktop Mobile
• In the
Remote Desktop
screen, choose a
Computer
from the drop-down menu.
• Type your
User name, Password
, and
Domain
(if required). Tap on
Connect
.
Programs 3 - 39
Disconnecting Without Ending a Session
IMPORTANT
These commands are accessed from the Start menu in the Terminal
Services screen used to access the PC’s commands. Do NOT use the Start menu on your Workabout Pro4.
• In the
Remote Desktop Connection
window, tap on
Start>Shutdown
.
• Tap on
Disconnect>OK
.
Ending a Session
• In the
Terminal Services Client
screen, tap on
Start>Shutdown
.
• Tap on
Log Off>OK
.
CHAPTER 4 SETTINGS
Motorola Software Advantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Appearance Tab – Changing the Theme (Background). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Beaming a Theme to Another Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Items Tab – Customizing the Today Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8
Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Advanced Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9
Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Sounds Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
The Devices Tab - Scanning for Bluetooth Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Filtering by Class of Device (COD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Pairing a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
About Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Paired Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4
4 - 2 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Connections – Connecting to the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Modem Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Advanced Modem Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Network Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Changing Network Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
VPN Connection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Managing an Existing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Proxy Server Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30
Selecting a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Fusion Wireless Companion - Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
Creating a New Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33
Launching an Existing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Resetting the Radio to Default Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Wireless Manager – Turning the Radio On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
App Launch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Program Buttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38
Up/Down Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
OneShots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39
Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40
Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41
Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
Lock Sequence Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
Phone: Sounds Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Phone: Security Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46
Phone: Services Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Phone: Network Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Phone: Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Phone: Bands Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Phone: Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49
Phone: Hearing Aid Mode Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50
Backlight – Screen and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Battery Power Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
External Power Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51
Backlight Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Choosing a Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52
Customer Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54
Settings 4 - 3
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
GPS (Global Positioning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Manage Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Trigger Mappings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Add and Edit Trigger Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Managed Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Main Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Storage Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Kiosk Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Administrator Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Shell Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Control Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Import and Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Activating a Change – User Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Regional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Remove Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
DataWedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Scanner Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Creating a Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Creating a Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Managing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Viewing a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Deleting a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Advanced CE Services Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Advanced Interface and Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Advanced Services Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Registry Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Settings 4 - 5
Overview of Software
Motorola Software Advantage
Motorola Software Advantage is a collection of applications and features designed to support system administrators and end users. These tools enable enterprises to customize the product to meet their needs and to maximize productivity.
• App Launch KeysKiosk
• Battery HealthTweakIt
• Bluetooth ManagerScanner
• DataWedgeManage Triggers
• Dr. DebugTotal Recall
• PartnerUpFusion Wireless Companion
Microsoft Software
Windows Embedded Hand-Held (WEH) 6.5 is a 32-bit, real-time Operating System. The OS is compatible with line of business applications written for Windows Mobile 6.x that protects previous investments in the Windows
Mobile platform.
Some other major components of WEH 6.5 are:
• Office Mobile 2010 (Word, Excel, PowerPoint, OneNote SharePoint)
• Internet Explorer 6
• Remote Desktop protocol
Settings
The applets contained under the
Settings
icon in the
Start
screen allow you to tailor how your Workabout Pro4 behaves, the appearance of the
Today
screen, and so on. The
Settings
applications are further divided into
Personal, System
, and
Connection
options.
4 - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Clocks & Alarms
Refer to
“Time, Date and Alarms” on page 2-17
for details about this applet.
Lock
This option allows you to assign a password to protect access to your phone service.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
, and then tap on the
Lock
icon.
It is critical that you store your password in a safe place. If you forget it, a ‘clean start’ must be performed by certified personnel. A clean start returns the Workabout Pro4 to factory settings. Only the data stored in a CF or
SD memory card are preserved.
• Tap in the checkbox next to
Prompt if phone unused for
to turn on password protection for your phone service.
• Choose the amount of time that the unit can remain idle before you are prompted to enter your password.
• In the
Password
type drop-down menu, choose the type of password you prefer to assign.
Simple PIN
allows you to enter a minimum of four numeric characters.
Strong alphanumeric
requires a minimum of 7 characters and must contain at least three of the following: uppercase and lowercase alpha characters, numbers and punctuation.
• Type your password in the
Password
field.
• Retype your password in the
Confirm
field.
• Tap on
OK
. A dialog box asks whether or not you want to save your password settings. Tap on
YES
to save your password assignment.
Home
The
Home
applet is used to customize your
Today
screen.
• Tap on
Start>Home
icon to display this applet.
Settings 4 - 7
Appearance Tab – Changing the Theme (Background)
The
Appearance
tab allows you to change the background appearance of the Today screen.
• Tap on the
theme
or background you want to use. Tap on
OK
to assign the background you’ve chosen to your Workabout Pro4.
NOTE
You can also use a personal picture as your background. Tap on the checkbox to the left of
Use this picture as the background
, and tap on the
Browse
button to locate your picture.
Beaming a Theme to Another Device
You can also
beam
your selection to another device. To scan for visible devices and beam a theme:
• Choose a
theme
or background, and tap on the
Beam
button.
The Workabout Pro4 scans for visible devices within range of the hand-held and lists them in the
Beam
screen.
• Tap on the device to which you want to send the theme.
A
File Receive Confirmation
dialog box appears on the device to which you are beaming the theme. If the recipient taps on
OK
, the file is downloaded onto their device. Note that the recipient can also tap on
Browse
to store the theme file in a different location.
4 - 8 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Once the recipient clicks on
OK
to accept the file, the device you chose is marked as
Done
.
Items Tab – Customizing the Today Screen
The items you see in the
Today
screen are
Windows Default
items. The
Items
tab allows you to customize the screen to suit your purposes.
NOTE
Refer to “Customizing the Today Screen” on page 2-16 for details about this screen.
Power
The
Power
applet provides information about the battery installed in your Workabout Pro4, and it allows you to define the behaviour of your Workabout Pro4 to minimize power consumption.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Power
icon.
Settings 4 - 9
Battery Power
This tab monitors and displays the current battery capacity of the battery installed in the Workabout Pro4.
Advanced Tab
This tab allows you to tailor how long the Workabout Pro4 can remain idle before the screen is turned off while running on battery power and also on external power.
NOTE
The options in the screen behave like
Suspend
mode. If the screen turns off, the unit is in suspend mode – tapping on the touchscreen or pressing a key opens the screen in which you were working before it was ‘turned off‘.
• To determine behaviour when the unit is running
On battery power
, tap in the checkbox to the left of
Turn off screen if device is not used for
.
• Tap in the drop-down menu next to this option, and choose the number of
minutes
the unit can remain idle before the screen is turned off.
• To determine behaviour when the unit is running
On external power
, tap in the checkbox to the left of
Turn off screen if device is not used for
, and choose a value in the associated drop-down menu.
Battery Details Tab
• In the scrolling tab bar, tap on the
Battery Details
tab.
4 - 10 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
This tab lists the specifications and battery capacity status of the battery installed in the Workabout Pro4. This is a view-only screen.
Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup
The
Estimated Battery Backup
is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect data until a fully charged battery can be installed in the Workabout Pro4. When the battery capacity is depleted up to the
Estimated Battery Backup Time
reserve specified in the
Suspend Threshold
tab, the Workabout Pro4 shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the Workabout Pro4. Once the unit shuts down, it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed, or the unit is inserted in a single bay USB cradle, four bay Ethernet cradle, or vehicle-cradle.
• Slide the
Suspend Threshold
button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup purposes. Data will be preserved to a maximum of 100 hours.
• Slide the
Suspend Threshold
button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes; this increases the Workabout Pro4 operating time – the amount of time the Workabout Pro4 will operate before shutting down – but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours.
Internal super-capacitors will protect the data stored in the Workabout Pro4 while the depleted battery is swapped for a fully charged one.
NOTE
Once the battery is removed, the super-capacitor will preserve the data stored on the
Workabout Pro4 for approximately 4 minutes. It is critical that you install a charged battery before this time elapses.
Settings 4 - 11
Battery Health
The
Battery Health
tab provides an estimate of battery health based on a number of different measurements, beyond battery capacity.
IMPORTANT
The Battery Health Meter is an estimate and should not be depended on to provide a 100% account of battery condition.
• In the scrolling tab bar, tap on the
Battery Health
tab.
Current Battery Health Meter
The
Current Battery Health Meter
default values are shown here as
***** (Excellent)
,
*** (Used)
, and
* (Battery should be replaced)
.
To display the
Battery Health Meter
:
• Tap on the
navigation bar
, scroll to and click on the
battery hotkey
.
Navigation bar
Battery hotkey
The image above shows the default
Excellent
status screen.
Enable Battery Health Service
This option allows you to enable or disable the battery health service.
4 - 12 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Show Popup UI on Device-Resume
The drop-down menu attached to
Show Popup UI on Device-Resume
allows you to determine when the battery status pop-up user interface (UI) will appear based on the battery health.
Edit – Changing Ratings Text
You can customize the ratings text with the
Edit
button. By enclosing your text within the html tag used for
Bold
<b>
(or removing the tag to unbold the text), you can change the text that will appear in the pop-up battery status screen. For example, the default text
Excellent
might be changed to:
Battery is excellent, and will last one day shift.
Wakeup Sources
This dialog box allows you to choose the actions that will wake your unit from a suspend state.
Sound & Notifications
The
Sounds & Notifications
icon allows you to specify when your Workabout Pro4 will emit sounds.
Sounds Tab
• Tap on
Start>Settings
, and then tap on the
Sounds & Notifications icon
to display this dialog box.
• Tap on the
checkboxes
and
radio buttons
to enable the event(s) that will cause your unit to emit a sound.
Settings 4 - 13
Notifications Tab
Tap here to play
your ring choices
Tap here to end
the ring test
This tab allows you to choose an event, and for each event, choose the audio notification or sound that the
Workabout Pro4 will emit for that event. For example, suppose you choose
Wireless network detected
from the
Event:
drop-down menu. If you check
Play sound
, the unit will emit an audible sound when a network is detected. You can also choose a number of associated options to tailor this option to your needs.
• Choose an event from the
Events
drop-down menu.
• Choose the relevant options for the
Event
you’ve chosen.
• To test your choice, tap on the arrow in the dialog box.
Connections Folder
This folder icon contains the applets you’ll need to set up connections using
Bluetooth
and an 802.11 radio.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections folder
icon.
Beam
Enabling the
Beam
applet makes your Workabout Pro4 visible and available to others wanting to beam information to your unit.
4 - 14 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Bluetooth
Setup
Bluetooth
is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area
Networks. The technology is based on a short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two
Bluetooth
-equipped devices come within a 10 meter range of each other, they can establish a connection.
Because
Bluetooth
utilizes a radio-based link, it does not require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
. Tap on the
Connections Folder
icon followed by the
Bluetooth
icon.
Turning the
Bluetooth
Radio On
Before pairing a headset or any other
Bluetooth
device with your Workabout Pro4, make certain that the
Bluetooth
device power is enabled and that the radio is switched on; it is enabled by default. If, for some reason, it has been disabled:
• Scroll to the
Mode
tab.
• Tap in the checkbox next to
Turn on Bluetooth
.
• Turn your
Bluetooth
device on and place it within a few feet of your Workabout Pro4.
• If needed, set your
Bluetooth
device to visible (discoverable) so that the hand-held can detect it and establish a connection.
The Devices Tab - Scanning for
Bluetooth
Devices
• Scroll to the
Device
tab.
Settings 4 - 15
• To discover and list all
Bluetooth
devices in range of the Workabout Pro4, tap on the
Scan
button in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.
The Workabout Pro4 scans for
Bluetooth
devices within a 10 meter range. Any
Bluetooth
devices within range appear in the
Bluetooth
list box. Any existing devices previously discovered and listed will also be displayed.
NOTE
To limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device, refer to ‘Filtering by Class of Device (COD)” in the next section.
The
Clear
button removes all
Bluetooth
devices listed except those with currently paired and connected services.
Device Pop-up Menu
The
Device
pop-up menu allows you to pair a device, update a device name or delete a device from the list.
Pair
begins the pairing process by querying the services and profiles of the discovered device. An authentication dialog box is displayed the first time a
Bluetooth
device is paired.
Rename
allows a new name to be assigned to a highlighted device.
Refresh Name
repeats the device name query, updating the name. This command is useful if a device is listed without a name (unknown), or if a device name has been changed remotely.
Delete
removes this device from the list.
Filtering by Class of Device (COD)
The drop-down menu at the top of the
Device
tab allows you to limit the scope of the scan to a particular type of device. If, for example, you choose
Computer
from this menu, only computers within range of the Workabout
Pro4 are listed in the
Device
tab. Choosing
All
lists all detected devices.
4 - 16 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Pairing a Device
If you intend to pair a device (a headset, for example), power the device on and bring it within 10 meters of the
Workabout Pro4 before proceeding with the discovery process described below.
To pair devices:
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode.
• Choose the
Devices
tab and
Scan
for devices in your area.
• When the scan is complete, tap on the
device
to which you want to pair.
• In the pop-up menu, choose
Pair
.
An
authentication
dialog box is displayed.
• If the remote device has authentication
enabled
, type the
PIN
in this dialog box.
• To proceed
without
authentication, tap on
Next
.
NOTE
If a remote device has authentication enabled and you’ve skipped the authentication process, a pop-up screen will ask if you want to allow the remote device to connect to the Workabout Pro4. Tap on
Yes
and type the PIN. When authentication is complete, tap on
Done
.
Settings 4 - 17
After entering the device PIN, the
Services
dialog appears with a list of services available for that device.
• Click in the checkbox to the left of the service to activate it.
• Click on
Done
.
NOTE
If you choose a service requiring additional information, associated dialog box is automatically displayed where further details can be completed.
Once you’ve completed the information:
• Tap on
Next
and then in the
Services
screen, tap on
OK
.
Servers Tab
When a remote
Bluetooth
device initiates a
Bluetooth
connection to the Workabout Pro4, the remote device is considered the ‘Bluetooth master’ and the hand-held, the ‘Bluetooth slave’. In order for the remote device to connect to the Workabout Pro4, the Workabout Pro4 must offer a service in the form of a server. The
Servers
tab allows these services to be enabled and configured. There are three server services available:
Serial,
Scanner
and
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile)
.
Serial
server enables the
Serial Port Profile
server; a
Serial Port
can be selected from the drop-down menu.
Keep in mind that when a port is chosen, an application must be open (connected) to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect.
Scanner
server enables a
Serial Port Profile
server and then relays it to the
Scanner Service
(SCS). This is used for
Bluetooth
barcode scanners that operate in client mode. SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input.
4 - 18 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
OBEX OPP
server enables the Object Push Profile server. A warm reset must be performed on the Workabout
Pro4 after a change is made to this option. The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device.
• Tap on the checkbox to activate the server – the associated port name is displayed beside the server name.
Mode Tab
When
Turn on Bluetooth
is checked,
Bluetooth
features are available. If this option is disabled, you cannot send or receive information using
Bluetooth
.
When
Discoverable
is enabled, other
Bluetooth
devices within range (approximately 10 meters) can detect your Workabout Pro4 and can establish a bond or use a Bluetooth service. Note that other devices can detect your unit whether or not a bond has been created.
About Tab
Name
displays the broadcasted name of the Workabout Pro4. The name can be changed in the
About
applet – tap on
Start>Settings>System>About
icon. Tap on the
Device ID
tab, and change the name.
Local Address
displays the MAC address (BD_Addr) of the
Bluetooth
chip.
HCI Version & LMP Version
display the version of the chip firmware.
Component
indicates the version of the
Bluetooth
Subsystem (the manager, drivers, etc).
Profiles
lists the supported profiles on this specific Workabout Pro4.
Settings 4 - 19
Paired Tab
This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services. The format of the name is <Device
Name>:<Service Name>. Additional information may appear in this screen such as the
Port Numbers
for Serial
Profiles service.
• Tap and hold down the stylus on an item in the
Paired
tab to display an associated pop-up menu.
This is a service-dependent menu – that is, it varies slightly depending on the service chosen in the
Servers
tab.
Query Services and Remove Commands
NOTE
The
Query Services
and
Remove
commands are available in all service-dependent menus, regardless of the type of service chosen.
•
Query Services
displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen.
•
Remove
unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab.
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile) Commands
The OPP defines two roles – a
Push Server
and a
Push Client
.
Push Server
is the device that provides an object exchange server.
Push Client
is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server.
OBEX OPP
contains the following unique menu option:
•
Send File
displays an
Open File
dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected. When the transmission begins, another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission.
4 - 20 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
HSP/HFP (Headset Profile/Hands-Free Profile) Service Commands
The
HSP (Headset Profile)
allows users to connect their device to
Bluetooth
enabled headsets and other audio devices.
HSP/HFP services
provide the following unique menu options:
•
Connect Audio
establishes an audio connection to the
Bluetooth
headset.
•
Disconnect Audio
disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset.
•
Volume Control
displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted.
Connecting Using a Bluetooth GPRS Phone
Once you’ve completed the
Bluetooth
settings, you can go ahead and set up communication through your
Bluetooth
-equipped phone.
Before you begin, make certain that the
Bluetooth
phone is turned on, that the
Bluetooth
radios in your Workabout Pro4 and phone are enabled (turned on), and that the hand-held and phone are within 10 metres of each other. Both should be discoverable.
1.
Tap on
Start>Settings
, and then tap on the
Connections
folder icon.
2.
Tap on the
Connections
icon. Under
ISP: WWAN - GPRS
, tap on
Add a new modem connection
.
3.
Type a name for the connection.
Settings 4 - 21
4.
Tap on the
Select a modem
drop-down menu, and choose
Bluetooth
. Tap on
Next
.
NOTE
If you are using another device to connect to the Internet, you can choose a different modem from the drop-down menu.
5.
Make certain that the phone is discoverable. Some phones also need to be pairable in order to accept a bonding request. Refer to your phone documentation for additional information.
6.
If the phone appears in the
My Connections
list, skip to step 13. If not, go to step 7.
7.
In the list, tap the
phone
you want to connect to, and then tap on the
Next
button. (Note that if your phone is not listed, tap on
Add new device
, and choose the phone from the list.)
8.
In the
PIN
screen, type a
personal identification number
(PIN) – you can enter up to 16 characters.
9.
Enter the
same PIN
on the phone.
10. If you wish, you can edit the name of the phone in the
Name
field.
11. Tap on the
Finish
button.
12. In the
My Connections
list, tap on the
phone
, and then on
Next
.
13. Enter the
dial-up phone number
for this connection, and tap on
Next
.
14. In the
User name, Password
and
Domain
fields, enter the
logon information
for this connection, and tap on
Finish
.
You can begin using the
Bluetooth
phone connection, for example, to send and receive e-mail, browse the
Internet with Internet Explorer, and so on.
Connections – Connecting to the Internet
To activate a connection, make certain that any necessary equipment (such as a radio) is installed in your Workabout Pro4.
You’ll need the following information from your ISP to make an Internet connection:
• ISP server phone number,
• user name, and
• password.
4 - 22 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
You’ll need to tap on
Start>Settings
, and then tap on the
Connections
folder icon to display the connections applets.
1.
In the
Connections
screen, tap on the
Connections
icon.
NOTE
In the Connections window, the Tasks tab is used to create new connections and manage existing ones. The Advanced tab allows you to choose a network. If you need to change these settings, contact your ISP or network administrator before making changes.
2.
Under
ISP: WWAN - GPRS
, tap on
Add a new modem connection
.
3.
In the
Select a modem
drop-down menu, choose a modem connection. If you haven’t already created
a modem connection, refer to “Modem Connection Setup” on page 4-22 .
4.
To connect to the Internet, launch the program you want to use. For example, launch Internet Explorer on your Workabout Pro4 to browse the Internet. Your Workabout Pro4 automatically connects.
NOTE
To set up a network card or wireless network connection to your ISP, add a new connection under
My Work Network
.
Modem Connection Setup
Before you begin, you’ll need the following information from your ISP or network administrator:
telephone number, password, domain name
, and
TCP/IP settings
.
If your Workabout Pro4 does not have access to a mobile phone network, insert a modem card in the unit.
1.
Tap
Start>Settings
. Tap on the
Connections
folder icon followed by the
Connections
icon.
2.
To create a new connection in either
ISP: WWAN - GPRS
or
My Work Network
, tap on
Add a new modem connection
.
Settings 4 - 23
3.
In the
Make New Connection
screen, type a
name
for the connection.
4.
In the drop-down menu under
Select a modem
, tap on your
modem type
.
WARNING
If your modem is not listed in the drop-down menu, choose Hayes Compatible on COM1.
5.
In the
My Connections
screen, enter the
phone number
exactly as you want it dialed. If, for example, you need to dial 9 for an outside line, enter 9 at the beginning of the phone number.
6.
Tap on the
Next
button.
4 - 24 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
7.
Type the
User Name, Password
and
Domain Name
as provided by your ISP or network administrator.
NOTE
Generally, you will not need to change any of the Advanced settings. For information about Advanced Modem Settings, review the next section.
Changes to Advanced settings are only required in the following instances:
- To change the baud rate settings, dialing string commands or credit card options.
- To change port settings.
- To enter TCP/IP settings because the server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses.
8.
Tap on the
Finish
button.
Advanced Modem Settings
TCP/IP Settings Tab
If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings. If you need to make changes, contact your ISP or network administrator for addresses.
Settings 4 - 25
Server Settings Tab
If your server assigns IP addresses dynamically, you will not need to change these settings.
Servers requiring assigned IP addresses may also need a way to map computer names to IP addresses. The
Workabout Pro4 supports a variety of name resolution options:
DNS, Alt DNS, WINS
and
Alt WINS
.
Your ISP or network administrator can determine which name resolution you need, and can also provide the server address. In addition, you will want to ask if alternate addresses are available. An alternate address may allow you to connect when the primary server is not available.
Domain Enroll
To protect sensitive company data, businesses use firewalls and proxy servers to limit access to company resources to company employees only. If you need to access information on your company server remotely, the
Domain Enrollment
utility allows you to sync your Workabout Pro4 credentials with your company enrollment server, allowing you to access your work remotely.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections>Domain Enroll
.
• Tap on the
Enroll
button.
4 - 26 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Enter your
enrollment password
– supplied by your company's network administrator or generated from your company pre-enrollment wizard.
• Type your
company e-mail address
and the
enrollment password
provided by your network administrator.
NOTE
If you uncheck
Automatically discover server
, a Server field is displayed where you must manually enter the server name.
Allow a few minutes for your Workabout Pro4 to sync and enroll in your company domain. You may need to restart your unit after the enrollment process is completed.
Network Cards
When the network card is inserted in your unit for the first time, the
Network Settings
screen is displayed automatically so that you can configure the card. If it does not appear, or if you want to change settings:
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections
.
• Tap on the
Network Cards
icon.
• If you need to specify server information, double-tap on the appropriate
adaptor
, and then tap on the
IP
Address
and/or
Name Servers
tab.
NOTE
Because most networks use DHCP, you should not need to change these settings unless instructed to do so by your network administrator.
Settings 4 - 27
• If necessary, use a network cable to connect the network card to your network. Refer to the documentation shipped with your network card for details.
• To activate the connection, launch the desired program (e.g., Internet Explorer). The Workabout Pro4 will connect automatically.
Changing Network Card Settings
• If you use your network card in two locations like work and home, you’ll need to change the network to which the network card connects.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections>Network Cards
.
• In the
Configure Network Adapters
dialog box, tap on the drop-down menu below
My network card connects to
, and choose either
The Internet
or
Work
.
VPN Connection Setup
A
VPN connection
provides a secure connection to servers through the Internet.
Before you begin, you need the following information from your network administrator:
password, domain name, TCP/IP settings
and a
host name
or
IP address
of the VPN server.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
. Tap on the
Connections folder
icon followed by the
Connections
icon.
4 - 28 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Under
My Work Network
, tap on
Add a new VPN server connection
.
• In the
Name
field, type a
name
for this connection.
• In
Host name/IP
, type the
VPN server name
or
IP address
.
• Tap on the
VPN type
radio button next to the type of authentication for your Workabout Pro4:
IPSec/L2TP
or
PPTP
. Your network administrator will let you know which option applies to your unit.
• Tap on
Next
.
• Choose the type of authentication in this screen. If you choose
A pre-shared key
, type the key provided by your network administrator.
• Tap on
Next
.
• Type your
user name, password
and
domain name
. If a domain name was not provided to you, try the connection without entering a domain name.
NOTE
Normally, you will not need to change any advanced settings. You will need to make changes only under only the following circumstances:
- The server to which you are connecting does not dynamically assign addresses, and
TCP/IP settings need to be entered.
- Server DNS or WINS settings need to be changed.
If you need to edit the
Advanced
settings, refer to
“Advanced Modem Settings” on page 4-24
for details about this tab.
• Tap on
Finish
.
• Launch a program like Internet Explorer to activate the connection. The VPN connection will start automatically.
Managing an Existing Connection
Once you’ve defined a connection, a new option appears in the first
Connections
screen –
Manage existing connections
.
Editing a Connection
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections folder
icon. Tap on the
Connections
icon.
• Tap on
Manage existing connections
.
Settings 4 - 29
Tap here
• To launch a connection from this screen, press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to activate.
Choose
Connect
from the pop-up menu.
• To delete a connection, press and hold the stylus on the connection you want to delete. Choose
Delete
from the pop-up menu.
NOTE
You can also create a new connection by tapping on the
New
button. To make changes to the settings for this connection, tap on
Edit
.
Changing a Connection Setting Name
Your Workabout Pro4 has two sets of connection settings:
My ISP
and
My Work Network
. If you want to change one or both of these options to something more familiar to you, follow these steps.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
. Tap on the
Connections folder
icon followed by the
Connections
icon.
• Under
My Work Network
or
My ISP
, tap on
Manage existing connections
.
• Tap on the
General
tab.
• Type the name you prefer in the field below
Enter a name for these settings
.
• Tap on
OK
.
4 - 30 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Proxy Server Tab
NOTE
If you are connected to your ISP or private network during synchronization, the Workabout Pro4 will download the appropriate settings during synchronization from your
PC. If these settings are not on your PC, or if they need to be changed, you’ll need to set up the proxy server connection manually.
To set up the proxy server connection manually, you’ll need the following information:
proxy server name, server type, port, type of Socks protocol used,
and
the user name
and
password
.
• Tap
Start>Settings
. Tap on the
Connections
tab followed by the
Connections
icon.
• Under
My Work Network
, tap on
Set up my proxy server
.
• Tap in the checkbox next to
This network connects to the Internet
and
This network uses a proxy server to connect to the Internet
.
• In the
Proxy server
field, type the
proxy server name
.
• Tap on
OK
to save your changes.
NOTE
If you need to change advanced settings such as a port number or proxy server type, you’ll need to tap on the
Advanced
button rather than tapping on OK. Advanced settings are described in “Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings” in the next section.
Changing Advanced Proxy Server Settings
• To change advanced settings such as the port number or proxy server type, tap on the
Advanced
button.
• Tap on the
proxy type
you want to change. For the appropriate server type, type the proxy server name and port.
• Tap on
OK
.
Settings 4 - 31
Selecting a Network
NOTE
Normally, you will not need to change these settings. Contact your ISP or network administrator before making any changes.
Private networks
are used for work-related activities. Internet networks are used for home connection to your
ISP. The
My Work Network
settings are used for
private network connections (corporate networks)
, while
My
ISP settings
are used for
Internet network
connections.
When you use programs such as Internet Explorer, your Workabout Pro4 automatically connects using private network settings under
My Work Network
or Internet settings under
My ISP
, depending on specifications. You can determine how your Workabout Pro4 connects.
• Tap
Start>Settings>Connections folder
icon.
• Tap on the
Connections
icon, and then tap on the
Advanced
tab.
• Tap on
Select Networks
.
• In the appropriate list, choose
My ISP
or
My Work Network
.
Fusion Wireless Companion - Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio
NOTE
For information about setting up your radio using
Windows Wireless Zero Config
,
refer to Appendix F: “Wireless Zero Config Settings” .
Workabout Pro4 contains an integrated 802.11a/b/g/n radio module. The
Fusion Wireless Companion
software is used to configure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles. Each profile specifies the security parameters used to connect to a particular WLAN as identified by its Extended Service Set Identification
(ESSID). The
Fusion Wireless Companion
software also allows the operator to control which profile out of a set of profiles is used to connect. Follow the steps in this section to help configure the radio in your unit.
WARNING
Due to regulatory requirements, this unit is set to
Enable 802.11d
by default. If your
Access Point does not support this setting, your unit may not be able to properly connect to the network.
4 - 32 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
A network profile contains settings for SSID (Service Set Identifier) and security options.
NOTE
In most situations, the configuration of your 802.11 radio will require parameter settings and access keys from a network administrator.
Connecting to the Internet
To connect to the Internet on a WLAN when using
Fusion Wireless Companion
, ensure that the network card setting is set to
Internet
:
• Ensure the Fusion radio is enabled and a profile is configured.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections>Wi-Fi.
• In the
My network card Connects to
drop-down menu, choose
The Internet
.
• Tap on
OK
.
Fusion Setup
NOTE
WLAN configuration information must be obtained from the system administrator before performing Fusion setup procedures.
• In the
Today
screen, tap on the
Fusion
softkey at the bottom of the screen to display the
Fusion Launcher
dialog box. Alternately, you can tap on
Start>Wireless Companion>Wireless Launch
.
NOTE
The Fusion setup example following uses
Open
encryption. Depending on what you choose, the setup may vary slightly.
The
Fusion Launcher
items and their corresponding applications are summarized below.
Application
Find WLANS
Manage Profiles
Manage Certs
Manage PACs
Description
Displays a list of the WLANs active in the area.
Used to create new profiles and manage and edit existing profiles.
Used to manage authentication certificates.
Used to manage a list of Protected Access Credentials (PAC) used with
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secure
Tunneling (EAP-FAST) authentication.
Settings 4 - 33
Options
Application
Wireless Status
Wireless Diagnostics
Log on/off
Fusion Help
Creating a New Profile
Description
Provides options which allow the user to configure the Fusion option settings.
Displays the status of the current wireless connection (view only).
Provides tools with which to diagnose problems encountered with the wireless connection.
Displays the Network Login dialog box used to log on to a particular profile or to log off the currently active profile.
Displays extensive on-device Help.
IMPORTANT
The steps below describe how to manually create a network. Keep in mind that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own network requirements. If, for example, you are using a different type of security for your network, the fields you complete may not match those described here.
• Tap on
Manage Profiles
.
• Tap and hold the stylus on the
Manage Profiles
window, and choose
Add
from the pop-up menu to display the
Wireless LAN Profile Entry
window.
• In the
Profile Name
dialog box, type a
name for the profile
• In the
ESSID Profile ID
dialog box, type the
ESSID
.
• Tap
Next
to display the
Operating Mode
dialog box.
• In the
Operating Mode
drop-down menu, choose
Infrastructure
. (Keep in mind that because the
Regulatory
option for this unit is set to
Enable 802.11d
by default, the operating mode is limited to
Infrastructure
.
4 - 34 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Tap
Next
to display the
Security Mode
dialog box.
• In the
Security Mode
drop-down menu, choose
Legacy (Pre-WPA)
.
• In the
Authentication
drop-down menu, choose
None
.
• Tap
Next
to display the
Encryption
dialog box.
• Choose an
Encryption Type
from the drop-down menu.
• Tap
Next
to display the
IPv4 Address Entry
dialog box.
• Ensure that all three items are checked. Tap on
Next
.
NOTE
These
IPv4 Address Type
options are enabled (checked) by default. If you deselect one or more of them, additional dialog boxes are displayed where you can specify the IP Address, Subnet Mask,
Preferred Gateway and Alternate Gateway.
• Tap
Next
to display the
Battery Usage
dialog box, and choose a power consumption option.
Settings 4 - 35
• Tap
Next
to display the
Performance Settings
dialog box, and choose one of the performance options.
• Tap
Save
.
Launching an Existing Profile
Your configured network profiles are listed in the
Manage Profiles
screen.
• To activate a profile in the
Manage Profiles
screen, tap and hold the stylus on the profile you want to launch.
• In the drop-down menu, choose
Connect
.
Resetting the Radio to Default Factory Settings
Resetting your unit, including a clean start, will not return the radio settings to the default values. To reset the radio to factory settings:
• Tap on
Start>Wireless Companion>Wireless Launch
to display the
Fusion Launcher
screen.
• In the
Fusion Launcher
screen, choose
Options
.
• In the drop-down menu, choose
Data Management
. Tap on the
Reset Options
and
Reset Datastore
buttons, and tap on
OK
.
• Press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE]
and
[Power]
button to perform a
warm reset
.
Wireless Manager – Turning the Radio On and Off
The
Wireless Manager
icon acts as a connection manager, providing access to all network connection types.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections folder
icon. Tap on the
Wireless Manager
icon.
This screen is used to switch the wireless network connection on and off. This screen also provides access to the setup screens for each wireless connection.
• To turn connections on and off, tap on the item(s) in the list.
4 - 36 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• To turn off all wireless connections, tap on
All
.
The
Menu
softkey at the bottom of the screen provides a shortcut to the setup screens for each of the options listed in the
Wireless Manager
screen.
Personal Folder
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Personal
icon.
App Launch Keys
This icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the application from a single key-press.
• Tap on
Start>Setting>Personal>App Launch Keys
icon.
Settings 4 - 37
To assign an application key:
• Tap the
Add
button.
• Press the key you want to use to launch an application. (If an unsupported key is pressed, a message appears on this screen letting you know.)
The cursor moves to the
App
field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key. If you need to, you can Browse through the information in your hand-held until you locate the application you want to launch.
• Once you’ve selected the file you want to map, tap on
OK
.
The cursor moves to the
Data
field. You can use this field if you need to assign special parameters to your application launch key. If you don’t want to assign any parameters, you can leave the
Data
field blank. If, for
4 - 38 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
example, you want to assign an application launch key to launch the Word Mobile application, you can leave this field blank. If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the Word
Mobile application, you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field.
• Tap on
OK
.
• If you need to
Edit
,
Remove
or
Add
another App Launch Key, you can do it from this final screen. Otherwise, tap on
OK
to save your
Application Launch Key
.
• To launch the application you chose, press the application key you assigned.
Buttons
A number of apps are included under this icon.
• Tap on the
Start>Settings>Personal>Buttons
icon to display the apps.
Program Buttons Tab
In the
Program Buttons
tab, you can customize the program hardware buttons to open your most used programs.
• Under
Select a button
, tap on the
button
to which you want to assign a program.
• Choose a program from the
Assign
drop-down menu.
Settings 4 - 39
Up/Down Control Tab
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Personal>Buttons
icon to display this screen. Scroll to the
Up/Down Control
tab.
Sliding the
Delay before first repeat
bar to the left decreases the delay between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat delay time.
Sliding the
Repeat rate
bar to the left slows the rate at which an [Up/Down] button repeats when pressed.
Sliding the bar to the right increases the key repeat rate.
OneShots
The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your Workabout Pro4 behave. For each modifier key – [ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [FN/ORANGE] and [FN/BLUE] – you have the following options in the drop-down menu:
Lock, OneShot
, and
OneShot/Lock
.
IMPORTANT
Once you’ve assigned a OneShot mode to a modifier key, you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection.
Lock
If you choose
Lock
from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it ‘on’ until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.
OneShot
If you choose
OneShot
, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.
4 - 40 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
OneShot/Lock
OneShot/Lock
allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this option and you press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key is pressed.
If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.
Macro Keys
A macro key is a single keypress that can be configured to output up to 200 characters (including [ENTER],
[BACKSPACE], [DEL], function keys, arrow keys, etc.). This feature can save time and effort when entering frequently used key sequences. For example, a macro key can be programmed to output a standard signature, such as “Sincerely yours, Bob” with a single keypress.
For all keyboard types, you can program up to 15 macro keys. Some Workabout Pro4 keyboards have macros keys ([M1], [M2] and so on) that are physically present on the keyboard. When you record a macro sequence and assign it to one of these predetermined macro keys, pressing that key (e.g., [M1]) executes the macro and sends the programmed key sequence to the hand-held as if it were entered from the keyboard.
If your keyboard does
not
have dedicated macro keys, or if you wish to use macro keys beyond the ones that are already present on the keyboard, you need to use Scancode Remapping to remap keyboard keys to act as
7, you could then use
Scancode Remapping
to remap the [z] key so that pressing it executes Macro 7 rather than the letter [z].
Recording and Saving a Macro
• In the
Macro
menu, highlight a Macro number. Tap on the
Record
button.
A
Record Macro
screen is displayed.
Settings 4 - 41
• Type the
macro sequence
you want to assign to a keyboard key. You can type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys into a macro.
• When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, tap on the
Stop Recording
button.
A new screen displays the macro sequence you created.
• Tap on the
Save
button to save your macro. Your macro key sequence is listed in the
Macro
screen.
• Tap on
OK
to save your macro key assignment.
Executing a Macro
• To execute a macro, press the key to which you’ve assigned the macro.
NOTE
Keep in mind that if you plan to program additional macros beyond the Macro keys on your keyboard, or if your keyboard is
not
equipped with dedicated macro keys, you
will need to use “Scancode Remapping” on page 4-42 to assign a keyboard key that
will act as a macro key.
Deleting a Macro
• In the
Macros
tab, highlight the macro number you want to delete.
• Tap on the
Delete
button.
Unicode Mapping
• Tap on the
Unicode Mapping
tab to display this screen.
The
Unicode Mapping
tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and [CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to
Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value. For example, “a (U+0061)” indicates that the character “a” is represented by the Unicode value “0061”, and so on.
Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values.
All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default
Unicode value.
Adding and Changing Unicode Values
NOTE
Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Unicode Mapping tab by tapping on [OK].
4 - 42 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Tap on the
Add/Edit
button.
• Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list.
• Position the cursor in the
Unicode Mapping
field, and type a
Unicode value
for the highlighted key.
NOTE
To add a shifted state – [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], tap on the checkbox next to ‘SHIFT
Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’.
Removing Unicode Values
• In the
Unicode Mapping
tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and tap on the
Remove
button.
Scancode Remapping
A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function, or a macro. Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the ‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents the [ENTER] key, etc.), perform a function (e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro.
There are four different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Orange table, the Blue table and the Shift table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the
Blue
table defines key presses that occur when the [FN/BLUE] modifier is on; the
Orange
table defines key presses that occur when the [FN/ORANGE] modifier is on; the
Shift
table defines key presses that occur when the [SHIFT] modifier is on. The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these four tables using
Scancode Remapping
.
The first column in the
Scancode Remapping
tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is displayed in the column labelled
V-Key
. In the column labelled
Function
, virtual keys that are ‘Shifted’ or ‘Unshifted’ are displayed.
Settings 4 - 43
If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number (e.g., Macro 2).
Adding a Remap
To add a new remapping:
• Tap the
Add
button at the bottom of the dialog box.
The
Remap Scancode
dialog box is displayed.
• Type the scancode in hexadecimal in the field labelled
Scancode
.
NOTE
The
Label
field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping.
Virtual Key, Function and Macro
The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scancode will be remapped to:
Virtual Key, Function
or
Macro
.
When
Virtual Key
is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off when the virtual key is sent. If
No
Force
is selected, the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.
When
Function
is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.
When
Macro
is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box.
• Choose
Virtual Key>Function
or
Macro
.
• Choose a function from the
Function
list, and tap on
OK
.
Editing a Scancode Remap
• In the
Scancode Remapping
tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.
• Tap on the
Edit
button, and make the appropriate changes.
• Tap on
OK
to save your changes.
Removing a Remap
• In the
Scancode Remapping
tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete, and tap on the
Menu
button, and choose
Remove
.
• Tap on
OK
.
4 - 44 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Lock Sequence Tab
The
Lock Sequence
tab allows you to lock the hand-held keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed accidentally when, for example, the unit is inserted in a holster.
• To lock the keyboard, tap in the checkbox next to
Enable key lock sequence
.
• Tap in the checkbox next to
Keyboard locked at startup
.
• In the
Key sequence
drop-down menu, choose the key sequence you need to type to unlock the keyboard.
• Reset the Workabout Pro4 – press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE]
key and the
Power
button.
NOTE
It is useful to leave the
Show popup message
enabled (default) so that anyone attempting to use the Workabout Pro4 keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen.
A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked.
• Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard.
The Phone – Managing Settings
NOTE
The Phone option is only available on units equipped with the Cinterion PHS8-P
GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio.
An optional phone feature is available for your Workabout Pro4 hand-held. This section details how to tailor phone settings like the ring type and tone, phone services, and so on.
Settings 4 - 45
IMPORTANT
For details about sending and ending calls, making conference calls, managing contacts, and so on, refer to
.
You can adjust phone settings such as the ring type and tone, choose phone services such as barring calls, and so on. There are a number of ways you can access phone settings.
• In the
Navigation Bar
, tap on the
Phone Settings
hotkey.
First, tap here to display your options.
Next, tap on the Phone
Settings hotkey.
• In the pop-up
Phone bubble
, tap on the
Settings
link,
or
Tap on
Start>Settings>Personal
icon>
Phone
icon.
4 - 46 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Phone: Sounds Tab
Ring Type and Ring Tone
The SIM card phone number is displayed at the top of this screen. The
Ring Type
drop-down menu allows you to tailor the type of ring used for incoming calls. The
Ring Tone
drop-down menu allows you to determine the ring tone of incoming phone calls. To test the ring type and tone you’ve chosen, you can tap on the Play button just below the Ring tone menu. Tap on the Stop button to end the sound test.
NOTE
For details about setting up
Ring type
and
Ring tone
to help you identify other
‘events’ such as successful scans, missed calls, voice mails, and so on, refer to
“Notifications Tab” on page 4-13
.
Keypad
This option allows you to determine the type of sound that keypad keys emit as you press them. You can also turn off keypad sounds.
Phone: Security Tab
Tap in the check box
(add a check mark) to enable PIN Security.
This option allows you to enable or change a
PIN
(Personal Identification Number) so that your phone function is protected from unauthorized use. Your SIM card manufacturer provides the default
PIN
which you can change in this field.
Changing a PIN
• Tap on the
Change PIN
button and use the phone keypad to enter your existing SIM card PIN. Tap on the
[Enter]
button in the phone keypad.
Settings 4 - 47
IMPORTANT
If you enter an incorrect PIN, a message is displayed letting you know that you’ll need to reenter the correct value.
You have a limited number of chances to enter the correct PIN. The number varies for different services. If you exceed this number, the
SIM will be disabled automatically. You will be asked to enter a PUK
(Personal Unlocking Key). In some cases, the PUK is printed somewhere on your SIM package. If this is not the case, you will need to call customer support.
Once you’ve entered the correct PIN, a new screen appears asking that you enter your new PIN.
• Type your
new PIN
– a number consisting of between 4 and 8 digits. Tap on
Enter
.
A new message lets you know that you need to confirm your new PIN.
• Retype your
new PIN
. Tap on
[Enter]
when you’re finished.
Enabling PIN Security
To activate PIN security:
• Tap in the
checkbox
to the left of
Require PIN when phone is used
.
When security is enabled, you will be prompted to enter a PIN before you are allowed to use the phone.
NOTE
Whenever this option is enabled or disabled, you will be asked to enter your PIN.
4 - 48 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Phone: Services Tab
The
Services
tab allows you to customize the behaviour of your phone. You can, for example, block all incoming calls, tailor to whom your caller ID will be transmitted, set up call forwarding and so on.
NOTE
Keep in mind that some services may not be supported by your network, or they may not have been subscribed to.
• Tap on the
service
you want to set up. Tap on
Get Settings
.
The
service
dialog boxes allow you to tailor your available services to meet your requirements.
Voice Mail Setup
If your service includes
Voice Mail
, choosing this option for the first time displays a screen in which you can enter your voice mail provider phone number.
Phone: Network Tab
NOTE
For details about choosing networks, refer to Appendix G: “Wireless Wide Area
, “Network Configuration” on page G-8.
Settings 4 - 49
Phone: Data Tab
This screen is used to configure your WWAN data connection to the ISP.
NOTE
For details about setting up your data connection, refer to
.
Phone: Bands Tab
By default, all frequency bands are enabled. Bands should not be disabled without knowledge about which bands are used by your network; an incorrect setting will prevent the WWAN modem from finding the network.
Phone: Diagnostics Tab
4 - 50 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
The
Diagnostics
tab lists details about each network found. The information in this screen may be useful to support personnel if they are attempting to diagnose a problem with your network.
Phone: Hearing Aid Mode Tab
When
Hearing Aid Mode
is enabled, the audio path is altered to accommodate those using a magnetically coupled hearing aid (T-coil).
System Folder
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
icon to display a group of system apps.
About
Tapping on
Start>Settings>System
tab, and then the
About
icon displays a grouping of tabs that provide device information.
Version Tab
This tab outlines the Windows Embedded Handheld 6.5 Professional version, processor information, memory size and a description of the expansion card, if one is in use.
Device ID Tab
This tab provides fields in which you can assign a
Device name
and
Description
(optional) for the Workabout
Pro4. This name is used by the Workabout Pro4 to identify itself to other devices.
Keep in mind that this must be a unique name across a network. If you are unable to connect to a network because another device with the same name is already connected, you’ll need to assign a new name here.
Copyrights
The
Copyrights
tab lists the copyright information for the software loaded on your Workabout Pro4.
Settings 4 - 51
Backlight – Screen and Keypad
Tapping on
Start>Settings>System
icon followed by the
Backlight
icon allows you to determine the
backlight
and
power
properties of the Workabout Pro4.
Battery Power Tab
This tab allows you to tailor the Workabout Pro4 backlight behaviour to best preserve battery life.
• To define how long the backlight should stay on when the Workabout Pro4 is not in use, tap in the checkbox to the left of
Turn off backlight if device is not used for.
NOTE
This option is essentially ‘suspend’ mode. If the backlight is turned off, tapping on the screen or pressing a key displays the screen in which you were working before the backlight turned off.
• Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the number of seconds or minutes the backlight will remain on when the hand-held is idle.
• To
Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped
, tap in the checkbox to the left of this option.
External Power Tab
This tab determines the behaviour of the backlight when the hand-held is using external rather than battery power. Refer to the instructions in
“Battery Power Tab” on page 4-51
.
4 - 52 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Backlight Tab
Screen backlight
Keypad backlight
This tab allows you to tailor the backlight behaviour of the Workabout Pro4 screen and keypad to best preserve battery life. The
top
sliding button adjusts the screen brightness while the
bottom
sliding button adjusts the keypad brightness.
• Slide the buttons to the left to decrease brightness and to the right to increase brightness.
Certificates
• Tap on
Start>Settings
, and then tap on the
System
icon.
• Tap on the
Certificates
icon.
A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificates listed in the
Certificates
tabs ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact, the public key that belongs to the submitter. The hand-held checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the hand-held explicitly trusts.
Your Workabout Pro4 has certificates already preinstalled in the unit. Personal certificates establish your identity, intermediate certificates, as the name suggests, identify intermediate certification authorities and root certificates establish the identity of the servers with which you can connect.
Choosing a Certificate
Normally, certificates already configured for your network are chosen automatically by the Workabout Pro4. If a certificate cannot be chosen automatically, you must choose it from the
Certificates
list.
• To choose a certificate, tap the desired certificate. Your Workabout Pro4 will connect automatically.
Settings 4 - 53
Personal Tab
The
Personal
tab lists the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date.
• To view additional information about a personal certificate, tap on a
certificate
in the list.
• To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on the item you want to delete until a pop-up menu is displayed. Tap on the
Delete
command.
Intermediate Certificates
The items in this list help identify intermediate certification authorities.
Root Certificates
• To view details about a certificate – who issued the certificate, to whom it was issued, the issue date and the expiry date – tap on a certificate in the list.
• To delete a certificate, tap and hold the stylus on a certificate. In the pop-up menu, tap on
Delete
.
4 - 54 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Contrast
Tapping on the
Contrast
icon displays a screen in which you can tailor the screen contrast.
• Drag the sliding button between
Light
and
Dark
to achieve the desired screen colour contrast.
Customer Feedback
This option allows Microsoft to track how you use your Workabout Pro4 so that they can make improvements to the software. The radio buttons in this screen allow you to turn this feature on or off.
Dr. Debug
Dr. Debug is an error diagnostic tool.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
. Tap on the
Dr. Debug
icon.
Status
This tab indicates the status (on/off) of the tools. Tapping on
Browse logs
displays error logs for your review.
Settings 4 - 55
Utilities
There are a number of utilities available through Dr. Debug. The
NetLog
utility is used to log network traffic.
The
RilLog
utility captures Radio Interface Layer (RIL) debug outputs. When you tap on the
Start
button, debug data is collected so that, if necessary, it can be forwarded to a technician for evaluation.
Settings
• Choose an
Error Level
from the drop-down menu.
• To change the location where debug information will be stored, tap on the button to the right of the
Log
Folder
option.
Encryption
This option allows you to encrypt the data on your storage card.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System tab>Encryption
icon.
Error Reporting
Error Reporting
allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
. Tap on the
System
icon followed by the
Error Reporting
icon.
4 - 56 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
GPS (Global Positioning System)
With a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver, you can locate your exact position on a map. However, even without a GPS receiver, several different mapping programs can run on your Workabout Pro4.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System tab>GPS
icon.
• Tap on the
GPS program port
drop-down menu, and choose the communication port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver.
NOTE
Your Workabout Pro4 may automatically detect the GPS receiver that you are using and enter the settings in the Hardware tab. If not, you’ll need to enter this information yourself. You can find this information in the user manual of the GPS receiver.
Windows Embedded Hand-Held automatically manages access to the GPS receiver. However, some programs may not work with automatic configuration. If this is the case:
• Tap on the
Access
tab, and disable
Manage GPS automatically
(recommended).
You can go to: http://www.microsoft.com/windowsphone/en-gb/howto/wp7/web/use-maps-to-find-a-place.aspx
if a map-viewing program is not included with your Workabout Pro4, and copy the file to your Workabout Pro4.
• Tap on the
Hardware
tab, and set the
GPS hardware port
to
COM2
. Set the
Baud rate
to
4800
.
Settings 4 - 57
Manage Triggers
Manage Triggers
allows you to configure how barcode scanners and other devices are triggered. You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single- and double-click, and the double-click time.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System>Manage Triggers
icon.
Trigger Mappings
A
trigger mapping
is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application, the module(s) – sometimes referred to as “trigger consumer(s)” – of the trigger source. Along with keyboard keys, trigger sources can also be grip triggers, external hardware triggers or software-based. When the specified key is pressed, the trigger consumer (for example, a decoded scanner) is sent a message.
IMPORTANT
It is not possible to have two or more identical mappings — for example
[F1] cannot be mapped to the Non-Decoded Scanner twice — even if the trigger type is different.
A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data or perform its normal function. For example, if the space button is used as a trigger source, it will not be able to send space characters to applications.
4 - 58 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Double-Click
When a key is pressed and released, then pressed again within the configured time (between 0 to 1000 milliseconds), a double-click occurs. See also
“Trigger Press Type” on page 4-59
.
Show All Modules
By default, the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings. Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed. By checking this checkbox, all mappings, both active and inactive, are displayed.
Add
Tapping this button brings up the
Add mapping
dialog (see below), so that you can add new trigger mappings.
Edit
Tapping this button brings up the
Edit mapping
dialog, so that you can edit existing trigger mappings.
Remove
Tapping this button removes an existing mapping.
OK
The
OK
button in the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made. If the [ESC] key is pressed, all changes are discarded.
Add and Edit Trigger Mapping
• Tap on
Add
to add a new trigger map, or tap on
Edit
to edit an existing trigger map.
Trigger Key
This drop-down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events, such as the Grip Trigger, Left Scan, etc., for the trigger module selected.
NOTE
It is possible to map the same source to different modules (trigger consumers) – for example, to both the Imager and Non-Decoded Scanner. If so, both devices/operations will occur simultaneously. This is not recommended in most cases, especially with devices such as Imagers.
It is also possible to map different sources to the same module (trigger consumer).
Settings 4 - 59
Add Key
Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo-box. To add a new source to this list, tap on the
Add Key
button. A dialog box pops up, allowing you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source.
Trigger Press Type
You can enable either an
Up/Down
or
Double Click
response to a trigger press. Normally, when a trigger
(keyboard key, etc.) is pressed and released, a “trigger down” event is sent to the “owner” – that is, the application receiving the trigger press information – followed by a “trigger up”. If Double Click is chosen in this menu, when the trigger is pressed, released, and then pressed again, a “double-click” event will occur. If a mapping with the Up/down type has also been configured for the same source, it will only receive the first set of trigger events.
Module to Trigger
This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses.
Show All Modules
By default, inactive owners are not shown. By checking this checkbox, all owners, both active and inactive, are displayed.
Managed Programs
Managed Programs
lets you view, download and install applications that are deployed by the
System Center
Mobile Device Manager
(a server-side solution that helps enable IT to have control of their device deployment with respect to security, management and access to the corporate network).
To access
Managed Programs
:
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
tab>
Managed Programs
icon.
NOTE
The system administrator can provide the details needed Managed
Programs effectively.
Memory
This applet allows you to view memory use and storage card memory allocation. To display the options for this applet:
• Tap on
Start>Settings
. Tap on the
System
tab followed by the
Memory
icon.
4 - 60 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Main Tab
This tab lists the memory allocated for file and data storage and for program storage.
Storage Card
The
Storage Card
screen indicates the total storage card or RAM disk memory along with the amount in use.
Microphone
Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand-held.
Settings 4 - 61
• Tap on the drop-down menu, and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain.
• Slide the tab at the top of the dialog box to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain.
Tapping on the
Default
button sets the current microphone you’ve chosen to the default gain. Tapping on
Default All
sets all microphones listed to their default gain.
PartnerUp
Tapping on this icon displays a number of pre-loaded applications. Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associated web site.
The operator can then install the application. If a license is required, it can be obtained by sending an e-mail to the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Rep.
Tapping on a preloaded client in the PartnerUp screen displays a drop-down menu from which the operator can choose from an array of related options.
Kiosk
Kiosk
allows the administrator to tailor how the Workabout Pro4 operates and the options the user can access.
Note that the look of the
Today
screen will change from icons that are finger accessible to a list of items best accessed using a stylus.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System>Kiosk
icon.
4 - 62 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
If an
administrator password
is not yet set, this is indicated at the bottom of this screen. Tapping on the
Administrator Password
option displays the following screen.
• Type a
New password
, and then re-enter it in the
Confirm new password
field.
NOTE
Once an administrative password is assigned, each time Kiosk is launched, a dialog box will be displayed requesting the password.
Kiosk Menu
The
Kiosk
menu provides access to the categories to help you tailor the look and operation of the
Workabout Pro4 for the user.
Settings 4 - 63
Administrator Password
If you want to change an existing password, you need to complete the
Administrator Password
screen:
• Tap on the
Administrator password
option, and type your
current password
.
• In the next field, type a
New password
. Retype the new password in the
Confirm new password
field, and tap on
OK
.
Shell Settings
The
Shell Settings
option allows the administrator to tailor what operators see and what is available to them when Workabout Pro4 is powered on. Note that these changes are not visible until the unit switches from
Administrator Mode
to
User Mode
. A
Kiosk Access screen
, the screen in which you can switch from
Administrator to User Mode, is displayed automatically once you’ve finished making changes and have tapped on OK.
Applications Tab
This tab allows the administrator to choose the applications that will be available to the user.
• Tap in the
checkbox
next to each application you want displayed on the
Today
screen.
Once the Workabout Pro4 is set to
User Mode
, the selected items from the
Application
screen are listed in the
Today
screen. A
Kiosk Access screen
, the screen in which you can switch from Administrator to User Mode, is displayed automatically once you’ve finished making changes and have tapped on OK. See “Activating a
Change – User Mode” on page 193 details.
4 - 64 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
The look of the
Today
screen differs significantly from the original version, appearing as a list of available items more suitable for a stylus than finger touch.
Adding Applications
The
Add
and
Edit
buttons allow you to search for applications in the storage areas on your Workabout Pro4
(e.g., Windows, My Device, etc.), and add applications to the list of items in the
Today
screen.
You can add a maximum of 18 applications, after which the
Add
button is greyed out. and the following message is displayed:
Maximum 18 entries reached
.
• To add additional applications that will be accessible to the user from the
Today
screen, tap on the
Add
button at the bottom of the
Application
screen. The
Select File
screen is displayed.
Tap here
Settings 4 - 65
The
View
drop-down menu at the top of this screen displays the storage areas in the Workabout Pro4.
Tapping on a storage area –
Windows
for example – displays the applications you can add to the
Today
screen from that storage area.
Advanced Tab
This tab provides a number of options to restrict what is available on start up.
Start Button and Notification Restrictions
The drop-down menu at the top of the
Advanced
tab allows you to limit access to the
Notifications
at the top of the screen and the
Start button
at the bottom of the screen.
4 - 66 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
When you choose an option, for example,
Disable access to Start and Notifications
, the sample bar below the drop-down menu marks the disallowed items in red.
Kiosk App Restrictions
To remove
Kiosk
from the
Start
screen:
• Tap in the
checkbox
next to
Administrator access in Start Menu
to deselect it. The
x
should not be present in the checkbox.
The
Administrator Key Sequence
drop-down menu provides three key sequences you can use to gain access to Kiosk when it is not accessible from the
Start
screen.
NOTE
If you disable “Administrator access in Start Menu” or if you “Disable Start”, the only way to access Kiosk or the Start screen applications is to type an “Administrator Key
Sequence”. In these cases, it is important that you make note of the key sequence you’ve chosen.
Launching an Application at Startup
If you enable
Launch an application on Startup
, a screen is displayed where you can choose the application that will be launched automatically when the Workabout Pro4 is powered up.
Settings 4 - 67
Tap here
• Tap in the checkbox next to
Launch an application at Startup
.
• Tap in the
View
menu at the top of the
Select File
screen, and choose the storage area from which you want to choose an application.
• Next, tap on the
application
you want the Workabout Pro4 to launch on startup.
Your choice is displayed in the
Advanced
tab.
Startup program
• Tap on
OK
.
NOTE
Remember that changes do not take effect until the Workabout Pro4 is set to User
Mode and the unit is reset.
4 - 68 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Phone Tab
The
Phone
tab allows you to define the phone buttons accessibility on the Workabout Pro4 keyboard by choosing an item from the
Configure the Phone Dialer buttons
drop-down menu.
NOTE
Remember that changes do not take effect until the Workabout Pro4 is set to User
Mode and the unit is reset.
Restrictions
The
Restrictions
screen allows the administrator to restrict access to applications.
NOTE
Remember that changes do not take effect until the Workabout Pro4 is set to User
Mode and the unit is reset. Refer to
“Activating a Change – User Mode” on page 4-72 .
Application Tab
Tapping in the
View
menu displays a drop-down menu where you can define restrictions for each storage area of the Workabout Pro4. Restricted items are marked in the checkbox to the left – in the sample screen above,
solitaire.exe
is restricted.
Settings 4 - 69
Advanced Tab
The
Advanced
tab lists system features you can block from user access. Tapping in the checkbox to the left of a feature adds a check mark indicating it is blocked.
Notifications
The
Notifications
tab allows you to choose which pop-up notifications are blocked from user view.
Control Panel Settings
This options allows you to tailor items displayed in both the
Settings
screen and in the
Today
screen.
NOTE
Remember that changes do not take effect until the Workabout Pro4 is set to User
Mode and the unit is reset. Refer to
“Activating a Change – User Mode” on page 4-72 .
Hide Tab
The
Hide
tab under the
Control Panel
allows you to determine which applications will be hidden in the
Settings
screen that is displayed when the operator taps on the
Start
button.
4 - 70 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Remember that only
unchecked
items in this list are hidden.
Accessible Tab
The
Accessible
tab allows you to choose which items will be accessible in the
Today
screen.
Import and Export Settings
This option enables you to Export your settings file (.xml), and save it in the location of your choice. In addition, an administrator has the option to Import these settings from one device to multiple devices of the same operating system.
IMPORTANT
A copy of this file should also be saved in a central repository for all .xml files with a predefined name so that other utilities can locate it.
Settings 4 - 71
Tapping on the
Export
button displays an
Export Settings
screen. The default Name –
Kiosk_Settings
– can be changed by the administrator even after it has been saved.
The .xml file contains all of the Kiosk configured settings, including the Administrator Password. When the file is imported to a device, the new password is applied immediately.
• Whether choosing to import or export files, the same file location options will be listed. Following the action, a message stating the success of the operation and the location of the file is displayed.
• With the exception of the password, changes made to settings take effect only after a warm reset. If further changes to the configuration are made, they will overwrite the changes caused by the import operation.
After importing a file, a dialog box appears requesting a reset now or later.
4 - 72 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Activating a Change – User Mode
To activate changes, you’ll need to switch from
Administrator
to
User Mode
. This
Kiosk Access screen
is displayed automatically once you’ve finished making changes and have tapped on OK.
• In the tab where you’ve made the changes, tap on
OK
. In the next screen – the
Kiosk menu screen
– tap on
OK
.
A new screen, the
Kiosk Access screen
, is displayed.
• Tap on
Change to User mode
.
You’ll need to reset the Workabout Pro4 so that the changes you specified can take effect.
• Tap on
Yes
to reset the Workabout Pro4 and activate your changes.
Regional Settings
To display the
Regional Settings
screen, tap on
Start>Settings
, and then tap on the
System
icon followed by the
Regional Settings
icon.
Settings 4 - 73
• Tap on the drop-down menu to choose your language and region.
Once you’ve selected a language and region, you may need to adjust the way numbers, currency, the time and the date appear in your Workabout Pro4.
• Tap on the tab associated with each of the items, and choose how each item should be displayed on your
Workabout Pro4.
Remove Programs
• Tap on
Start>Settings
. Tap on the
System
icon followed by the
Remove Program
icon.
Tapping on the
Remove Programs
icon displays a screen listing the programs that can be removed from your unit.
• To remove a program, highlight it and then tap on the
Remove
button.
4 - 74 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
DataWedge
IMPORTANT
Go to www.motorolasolutions.com/support for help with this application.
DataWedge
is a mobile device application that allows any application to receive data from barcode, RFID, magnetic stripe and serial devices.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
, and then tap on
System
followed by the
DataWedge
icon.
Scanner Services
NOTE
For information about the
Options
,
Translations
, and
Ports settings
, see
Appendix C: “Scanner Services” .
IMPORTANT
The default barcode application is
DataWedge
. If you prefer to use the
Scanner Services
application, you’ll need to take a few extra steps to display the icon. Follows the steps in the bulleted points below.
Settings 4 - 75
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System>TweakIt
icon.
• Under the
Advanced
tab, tap on
Advanced Services Settings
, and double-tap on
Scanner Services
.
• In the
Scanner Services
dialog box,
uncheck
Use DataWedge (Uncheck for Psion Legacy)
.
• Press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE]
and
[Power]
buttons to reset the unit.
IMPORTANT
To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE] key and the [Power] button simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
Screen
• Tap
Start>Settings.
Tap on the
System
icon, and then tap on the
Screen
icon.
This icon allows you to align (calibrate) your touchscreen, turn
ClearType
on and off and adjust the size of the text displayed on the Workabout Pro4 screen.
IMPORTANT
Refer to
“Calibrating the Touchscreen” on page 2-10 .
System Properties
This program identifies the computer software and hardware components, indicating which components are installed, their identification, version or part numbers, and whether they are enabled or disabled.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
, and then tap on the
System Properties
icon.
Tapping on the
Export
button creates a log (SystemProperties.xml) of your current components, which is placed in the My Devices folder in Windows Explorer.
4 - 76 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Instead of expanding each section individually, you can also choose to open all the lists at once by tapping on the
Expand
button, which will then change to a Collapse button to enable you to collapse all the sections as well.
Task Manager
The
Task Manager
screen lists all running tasks (applications) or processes. This applet provides a number of options to manage these.
• Tap on
Start>Settings
. Tap on
System
, and then the
Task Manager
icon – the
Task Manager
screen is opened.
•
End Task:
To shut down an application,
highlight the program
in the list, and tap on the
End Task
softkey in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen.
Task Manager Menu
The
Task Manager menu
provides additional options to help you manage your applications.
• Tap on the
Menu
softkey at the bottom of the screen.
•
Switch To:
Makes the highlighted application active.
•
End All Tasks:
Shuts down all applications listed.
•
View:
Allows you to list either all running applications or all processes.
Settings 4 - 77
•
Sort By:
Allows you to sort active applications or processes based on Memory size, CPU or application or process Name.
•
Refresh:
Updates the list of applications or processes.
•
Exit:
Closes the Task Manager.
Total Recall
Total Recall
is a utility developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot, as well as clone settings to other devices. This utility creates a restore point of a device at a known state. This can be used as a backup of the device (the administrator can clean the terminal and restore the profile at any time), or a clone
(the administrator can store different configurations for different uses to clone to other hand-held computers).
NOTE
Total Recall works differently (e.g. restore on cold boot or on clean boot) on different OS platforms and versions (e.g. Windows CE 5.0, 6.0, Windows Mobile,
Windows Embedded Hand-held). For detailed information and other updates on
Total Recall information, please go to the Ingenuity Working website at: http://community.psion.com/knowledge/w/knowledgebase/total-recall.aspx
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
. Tap on the
Total Recall
icon.
In the start up screen, you can choose from four options:
Create Backup
,
Create Clone
,
Manage Profile,
and
Delete Profile
.
Creating a Backup
• Tap on the
Create Backup
button to begin the process.
4 - 78 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
This dialog box displays the Profile Name and the storage destination for the profile file.
• In the
Profile Name
field, type a name for a profile.
• If you want to choose another location for your backup file (optional), tap on the
[...]
button to the right of the
Profile Location
field and choose one of a number of folders.
IMPORTANT
Any profile not stored in persistent memory (Application directory (Flash Disk), external USB drive) will be erased during a clean boot; therefore, you should store profiles on a persistent drive.
When performing an autorestore, the program only searches for the profile located in the \Application\ or \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored. Only one profile can reside in that folder.
- Tap on
Start
. A backup of the current settings will be created and saved to the specified location. The unit will then reboot.
To view profiles and choose restore options, refer to “Managing Profiles” on page 4-79 .
Creating a Clone
Cloning allows you to copy settings or configurations from one computer to another. There are two types of clones to choose from: a
Full Clone
and a
Settings Only Clone
.
A
Full Clone
contains all files, most of the registry, and the settings files.
IMPORTANT
The target device for a Full Clone MUST have the same model type and OS build as the source, otherwise problems can occur. For example, if the target device has a newer build of the OS, the new build may have a different set of registry keys that may conflict with the source.
A
Settings Only Clone
can be copied to a wider array of devices, but it should not be used as an autorestore profile.
• Tap on the
Create Clone
button to begin the process. Your Workabout Pro4 model type and OS will be identified in the cloning statement to ensure that you target devices of the same type.
• Give the clone profile a name and location.
Settings 4 - 79
• Tap on
Next
.
• In the next screen, choose
All
for a
Full Clone
, or
Selected Options
for a
Settings Only Clone
. If you choose
Selected Options
, a menu will open to enable you to decide which options you want cloned.
Managing Profiles
You can view profiles and choose profile options from the menus in this section.
Viewing a Profile
• Tap on the
Manage Profile
button to see your list of profiles. Highlight a profile, and then you can choose to
View
the Profile Summary and go on to the next menu, Profile Details.
List of profiles
Profile Summary
Profile Details
4 - 80 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Profile Options
• Tap on the
Manage Profile
button to see your list of profiles, as shown above. Highlight a profile, and tap on the
Next
button to choose from options to restore or clone the profile. You can choose from four profile options:
Restore Now
,
Set for Autorestore
,
Upload to A.R.C.,
and
Clone to USB
.
• Next, tap on the option button you want to use:
•
Restore Now
– restores the profile immediately. If you are restoring a profile that is a backup or Full Clone, the computer will clean reset first; if the profile is a Settings Only Clone, it will not.
•
Set for AutoRestore
– creates a profile that is automatically restored following a cold reset or a clean start. The profile is stored in the
\Application\ or \Flash Disk\TotalRecall
folder.
IMPORTANT
After setting an autorestore profile, that profile will overwrite any other profile already placed in the \Application\ or \Flash Disk\Total-
Recall folder.
In an autorestore, Total Recall only restores the profile located in the
\Application\ or \Flash Disk\TotalRecall folder. If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored.
Settings 4 - 81
•
Upload to A.R.C
– uploads the profile to the Active Remote Configuration server. After you tap on
Send
, a message will come up either confirming that the upload was complete or that the connection to the server failed.
•
Clone to USB
– writes a clone of the profile to the USB drive. After you tap on the button, a message will come up either confirming that the USB drive is ready for deployment, or that it is not available.
• When you are ready to install the profile on another unit, turn on the next computer to be cloned and insert the USB key. The profile will be automatically installed to the computer’s
\Application\ or \Flash Disk\Total-
Recall
folder. There is a short delay in deployment so that you can cancel the process if needed.
USB drive prepared for cloning Autorun installation on next Workabout Pro
Deleting a Profile
• In the
Total Recall
home screen, tap on
Delete Profile
.
4 - 82 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Highlight the backup you want to delete, and tap on the
[-->]
(Next) button.
A warning pop-up screen appears asking if you’re certain that you want to delete this file.
• Tap on the
Yes
to delete the file.
TweakIT
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
.
• Tap on the
TweakIT Settings
icon.
This utility allows you to ‘tweak’ or adjust system settings such as the interface, network and servers.
Advanced CE Services Settings
FTP Server
This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers. Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folder – that is, files are always loaded from the FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server.
If this option is disabled, a warm reset must be performed to accept the change.
Settings 4 - 83
Advanced Interface and Network Settings
Enable IPv6
This option allows you to enable Internet Protocol, version 6, that has been published to use 128-bit IP address
(replacing version 4).
Modem Logging
When this option is enabled, the Workabout Pro4 logs AT commands (e.g., dial-out information, password string, etc.) that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes. Modem commands are stored in:
\MdmLog.txt.
Advanced Services Settings
Scanner Services
The
Scanner Services
option is used to activate legacy
Scanner Services
application and turn off the
DataWedge
application.
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) Server
The
SNTP Server Name
typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize Workabout Pro4 time with that of the time server. A warm reset must be performed once the server name has been entered.
4 - 84 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Registry Editor
This option is reserved for senior administrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values.
Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the Workabout Pro4.
CHAPTER 5 PERIPHERAL DEVICES &
ACCESSORIES
PERIPHERAL DEVICES & ACCESSORIES
Installation – Chargers and Cradles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Power Consumption Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Operator Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Important Charger Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Charging a Battery Installed in the Workabout Pro4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Charging a Spare Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Battery Charge Duration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Charger LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Four Bay Ethernet Cradle – WA4204-G2 & WA4304-G2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Four Bay Ethernet Cradle Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Four Bay Ethernet Cradle Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Inserting a Workabout Pro4 in the Four Bay Ethernet Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Network Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Network Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5
5 - 2 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Battery Charging – LED Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Network Link Unsuccessful . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Hand-Held LED does not Light when Docked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Battery Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Battery Charge Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Charge Indicators – The LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Operating 1D Laser Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Operating 2D Imagers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 3
Carrying Accessories
There is a variety of carrying accessories to help the operator work safely and comfortably with the
Workabout Pro4.
Carrying Accessory
Hand Strap - 7528 Long
Hand Strap - 7528 Short
Shoulder Strap for carrying case
Carry Case -7528 Long Standard
Carry Case - 7528 Long with universal end-cap - open ended
Carry Case - 7528 Short Standard
Carry Case - 7528 Short with universal end cap - open ended
Rubber Boot - 7528 Long with GSM
Rubber Boot - 7528 with SE1524ER laser end-cap
Soft Holster and Belt - for use with pistol grip
Pouch Nylon with metal swivel and belt loop
Pistol Grip for slim pod
Pistol Grip - Flush Mount for SE1524ER laser and other end cap scanners
Model Number
WA6025
WA6125
CV6021
WA6080
WA6081
WA6180
WA6181
WA6400
WA6402
WA6083
WA6084
WA6003
WA6103
IMPORTANT
Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories. These chemicals may damage the plastic casing.
Attaching the Hand Strap
The hand strap can be attached to the back of the Workabout Pro4 to provide a secure means for operators to carry the hand-held.
The hand strap is attached to the back of unit using two Phillips head screws provided with this accessory.
5 - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Use a Phillips screwdriver to attach the strap to the two threaded inserts on the back of the Workabout
Pro4, near the top of the unit.
• Stretch the hand strap toward the base of the Workabout Pro4, and hook the bottom of the strap into the slot near the base of the battery pack. A tethered stylus and optional external stylus tube can be attached to the hand strap as illustrated below
Tethered Stylus
Stylus Tube
Attaching the Pistol Grip
There are a number of pistol grips available to you depending on the type of scanner/imager installed in your hand-held. Refer to the table in
Carrying Accessories on page 5-3
for a list of pistol grip model numbers and the scanners/imagers with which they are compatible.
NOTE
The few steps required to attach the pistol grip to the Workabout Pro4 are common to all types of pistol grips. However, if you plan to use the Flush Mount Pistol
Grip (WA6103), you’ll need to install a special trigger back plate before following these steps to attach the pistol grip. Refer to
“The Trigger Back Plate Kit with
Flush Mount Pistol Grip” on page 5-6
.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 5
The pistol grip is attached to the four threaded inserts on the back of the Workabout Pro4. Four Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory.
NOTE
Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly.
• Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pistol grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the Workabout Pro4.
• Tighten the screws to a torque of 3 lbs-in (3 kgf-cm) to secure the pistol grip in place.
• Insert the stylus in the base of the pistol grip.
5 - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
The Trigger Back Plate Kit with Flush Mount Pistol Grip
The trigger back cover kit, model number WA9301, provides a special back cover that incorporates a scanner interface board and a switch; and triggers the SE1524ER long range laser, model number WA9022. WA9301 is required for WA9022 to function (with or without a pistol grip). This kit is also compatible with the Flush Mount
Pistol Grip, model number WA6103.
The trigger back cover kit, model number WA9302, provides a special back cover that incorporates a scanner interface board and a switch. This kit enables a pistol grip to trigger the following end cap scanners for the
Workabout Pro4:
Model Number
WA9016
WA9018
WA9020
End-Cap
SE965 end-cap
SE655 end-cap
SE4500 end-cap
The pistol grip is available separately from this kit as model number WA6103.
WARNING
The installation of this scanner/imager end-cap must be performed using the appropriate anti-static devices. If unavailable, discharge static from your body by touching a grounded metallic object before opening any covers on the unit.
WARNING
The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard. This product may contain a laser scanner that emits less than 1.4 mW maximum radiant power at a wavelength of 650 nm.
This product complies with CRH 21 CFR 1040 Class II and IEC
60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001 Class 2 laser product.
Before You Begin
WARNING
Back up any data in RAM before you begin.
Installing the Back Plate
• If your unit is using AC power, disconnect it.
• Remove the stylus from the end-cap.
• Remove the battery pack.
• Loosen the four screws securing the end-cap, and remove the end-cap.
• Unlatch the two connectors on the interface board on the new back plate.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 7
Figure 5-1
J1
J2
• Position the lower end of the new back plate next to the back opening of the unit.
• Insert the flex cable from the end-cap into J2 on the interface board. The contacts on the flex cable face towards the interface board.
Figure 5-2
Tape
Tape
1.
Latch the connector.
2.
Flip the back plate upwards.
3.
Insert the flex cable from the Workabout Pro4 main logic board into J1 on the interface board. The contacts on the flex cable face towards the interface board.
4.
Latch the connectors.
5.
Cut the Kapton tape square provided in two equal pieces.
6.
Remove the Kapton tape from the release liner. Apply one piece over the end of the flex cable and the imager’s flex connector. Apply the other piece over the other end of the flex cable and the back plate
flex connector, as shown in Figure 5-1 . This secures the flex cable at both ends.
5 - 8 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
7.
Turn the back plate over.
8.
Fasten the new back plate onto the Workabout Pro4 using the supplied screws (PN 9009770).
9.
Insert the battery, and install the battery cover.
Installing the Flush Mount Pistol Grip
The Flush Mount Pistol Grip, model WA6103, is intended for use with Workabout Pro4 units (7528 Long and
7528 Short) which have the Trigger Back Plate installed. Review the first few paragraphs at the beginning of
IMPORTANT
Back up any data in RAM before you begin.
1.
If your unit is using AC power, disconnect it.
2.
Remove the battery cover and battery pack.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 9
3.
Remove the screw-on cap, if present, from the switch in the middle of the back plate.
Battery Battery Pack Cover
Screws (4 X)
Switch
4.
Lower the Flush Mount Pistol Grip into place over the back plate, aligning the screw inserts on the hand-held with the screw holes in the pistol grip.
5.
Insert and tighten the four screws provided with the pistol grip.
6.
Replace the battery and battery cover.
7.
Insert the stylus in the bottom of the pistol grip handle.
Protective Carrying Case
A carrying case is available for the Workabout Pro4 to shield the unit from damage. It is equipped with a soft plastic window to protect the unit display and keyboard. A variety of cases are available, depending on the type of end-cap attached to your unit.
5 - 10 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Soft Shell Holster
A soft shell holster with removable belt and swivel holster pad can be used to hang a Workabout Pro4 with a pistol grip from your waist
Figure 5-3
Soft Shell Holster
Soft Shell Holster
Swivel Holster Pad and
Removable Belt
• Insert the belt in the swivel holster pad.
• Attach the pad on either the left or right side of the holster case, depending on whether you are left- or right-handed.
• Fasten the belt comfortably around your waist. Slide the adjustable ring on the belt to tighten the holster in place.
• Connect the safety tether cord to one of the clips on the bottom of the soft shell holster. Connect the other end to the hole in the end of the Workabout Pro4 pistol grip. This tether will catch the unit in case of a drop.
The tether can be adjusted to the operator’s height. The clips will break away in case of a severe force.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 11
The Batteries
NOTE
Review Chapter 8: “Specifications” for details.
The Workabout Pro4 will operate with the following Lithium-Ion battery pack:
• 4400 mAh battery pack (Model Number WA3010)
Adaptor Cable Options
The following adaptors can be ordered for your Workabout Pro4:
Adaptor Cable Description
Tether to USB A cable. This cable is used to connect USB devices such as USB Flash memory devices.
Tether to Dsub9 converter Cable
USB to Ethernet adaptor.
RS232 adaptor for single bay USB cradle WA4003-G2.
Model Number
WA1002
WA4020-G2
WA4071
WA4015-G1
Chargers and Cradles
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind when ordering a charger or cradle, you must also order the appropriate power cord separately.
Motorola offers a variety of chargers and cradles for the Workabout Pro4. These include:
• AC Adaptor – Model No. PS1050-G1
• Automotive Adaptor – Model No. WA3113-G2
• Single Bay USB Cradle – Model No. WA4003-G2
• Single Bay Cradle for 7528 Long – Model No. WA4204-G2
• Four Bay Ethernet Cradle for 7528 Short – Model No. WA4304-G2
• Four Slot Battery Charger with AC Adapter 110-240V - no lead – WA3004-G1
• Port Replicator – Model No. WA4005-G1
• Powered Vehicle Cradles – Model Nos. WA1210-G2 and WA1310-G2
• CLA (5V DC Jack) – Model No. PS3050
Installation – Chargers and Cradles
When installing a charger or cradle, consider the following guidelines.
• Keep chargers and cradles away from excessive dirt, dust and contaminants.
5 - 12 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0° C to 45 °C (32° F to 113° F).
It is recommended that the charger or cradle be operated at room temperature – between 18° C and 25° C
(64° F to 77° F) for maximum performance.
After unpacking your unit:
• Visually inspect the charger for possible damage.
• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
Power Consumption Considerations
Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and/or cradles is adequate for the load, especially if several chargers and cradles are being powered from the same circuit.
• Four Slot Battery Charger – can consume up to 2A @ 120VAC or 1A @ 240VAC.
• Four Bay Ethernet Cradle – can consume up to 3A @ 120VAC or 1.5A @ 240VAC.
Operator Controls
Workabout Pro4 cradles and chargers have no operator controls or power switches.
Important Charger Safety Instructions
•
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
– This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for battery chargers.
• Before using the battery charger, read all instructions and cautionary markings on (1) battery charger, (2) battery, and (3) product using battery.
• The mains power cord shall comply with national safety regulations of the country where the equipment is to be sold.
• Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger manufacturer may result in fire, electric shock, or personal injury.
• To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger, pull the plug rather than the cord.
• Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
• Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately.
• Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualified service personnel.
• Do not disassemble the charger; it should be repaired by qualified service personnel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.
• To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.
• An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure:
- The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size and shape as those on the charger.
- The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than
16 AWG.
• Do not expose the charger to rain or snow.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 13
• Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10°C (50°F). Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least two hours.
• Do not use the charger if, after an overnight charge, any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing. The charger should be inspected by qualified service personnel.
• Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than lukewarm. The equipment should be inspected by qualified personnel.
Single Bay USB Cradle
The Workabout Pro4 can be inserted in a Single Bay USB Cradle, model number WA4003-G2.
Figure 5-4
Single Bay USB Cradle
Workabout Pro4
Charge Well
Release Button
Connector
Pins
LED
(Indicates charge status of a spare battery inserted in the rear charge well of the single bay USB cradle.)
NOTE
The single bay USB cradle is shipped with its own user manual. It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates.
5 - 14 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Figure 5-5
Back Of Single Bay USB Cradle
Spare Battery
Spare Battery
Charge Well
Client USB Port
Host USB Port
DC IN Socket
IMPORTANT
This single bay USB cradle can only be used to charge Motorola approved Lithium-Ion batteries.
Charging a Battery Installed in the Workabout Pro4
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED
BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
• Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN socket on the single bay USB cradle. Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet.
• Slide the hand-held into the cradle, making certain that the LIF (Low Insertion Force) port on base of the
Workabout Pro4 is securely seated on the cradle connector pins. An icon is displayed briefly in the navigation bar at the top of the hand-held screen indicating that the unit is properly installed in the station –
.
The LED on the Workabout Pro4 lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging will begin. It is safe to leave the unit in the single bay USB cradle while it is not in use – the battery will not be overcharged.
Charging a Spare Battery
• Insert the battery in the spare battery charge well at the back of the single bay USB cradle, aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the spare battery charge well.
Battery Charge Duration
A fully discharged battery can take up to 4 hours to charge. The single bay USB cradle stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged – there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 15
Charger LED Indicators
The single bay USB cradle is equipped with a single dual-coloured LED indicator in the lower-right corner of the front panel.
LED Behaviour
Off
Solid Green
Fast Flashing Green
Slow Flashing Green
Solid Red
Flashing Red
Charge Status
No battery detected in the slot.
Charge complete.
Battery charged to less than 80% of capacity.
Battery charged to greater than 80% of capacity.
Battery temperature outside of charge range – 0° C to 50 °C.
Battery is not charging. Battery fault.
NOTE
Battery charging continues whether the hand-held is switched on or off.
Troubleshooting the Charging Operation of the Cradle
The
“Four Bay Ethernet Cradle – WA4204-G2 & WA4304-G2” on page 5-17
LED operation also applies to the charging behaviour of the single bay USB cradle.
Linking a Workabout Pro4 to a PC
The single bay USB cradle can be connected to a PC so that you can exchange files in the same way that you would between PC drives. A USB cable is included with your single bay USB cradle.
NOTE
For details about data transfer through Windows XP and ActiveSync and through
Vista, refer to
“Data Transfer Between Workabout Pro4 and a PC” on page 2-28
To link the Workabout Pro4 to a PC:
• Insert the hand-held in the single bay USB cradle.
• Insert the USB cable into the single bay USB cradle Client USB connector. Attach the other end of the cable to a USB port on the PC.
5 - 16 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Linking a Workabout Pro4 to an Ethernet Network
An USB-Ethernet adaptor cable – model number WA4010-G1 – is used to connect the Workabout Pro4 to an
Ethernet network through a single bay USB cradle.
Figure 5-6
USB-Ethernet Adaptor Cable
Ethernet
Port
USB
Connector
• Insert the adaptor’s USB connector into the Host USB port on the single bay USB cradle.
• Connect your network Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the adaptor cable.
Network Access
The hand-held unit automatically detects insertion into the cradle and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB-Ethernet converters.
Network Addressing
The host application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a specific Workabout Pro4 on the network. If a link is established between a Workabout Pro4 and a host, the application on the host and on the hand-held must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the Workabout Pro4 is removed from the cradle, interrupting the link.
Troubleshooting the Single Bay USB Cradle Operations
The indicators, applications and drivers required to use and monitor the single bay USB cradle as a dock (as opposed to a charger) are installed on the Workabout Pro4 – no applications are present on the cradle itself.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 17
AC Wall Adaptor – Model #PS1050-G1
The AC wall adaptor available for your Workabout Pro4 allows you to operate your hand-held using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit.
Adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following countries are shipped with the AC wall adaptor: United Kingdom,
Australia, Europe and North America.
Universal AC Power Supply
Adaptor Plugs
DC Power Plug
• Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country. Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal
AC power supply, snapping it into place. These two pieces, coupled together, are referred to as an AC wall adaptor.
• Insert the DC power plug into the DC IN socket at the base of Workabout Pro4, located between the tether and LIF ports.
• Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet.
Four Bay Ethernet Cradle – WA4204-G2 & WA4304-G2
Figure 5-7
Four Bay Ethernet Cradle
NOTE
WA4204-G2 is designed for Workabout Pro4 Long models; WA4304-G2 is designed for Workabout Pro4 Short models.
The four bay Ethernet cradle is shipped with a manual. It is critical that this manual be reviewed for additional information and updates.
5 - 18 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
The four bay Ethernet cradle permits each of four docked Workabout Pro4s to communicate with a 10/100
BaseT Ethernet network at greater than 2Mbps. It also provides sufficient power to operate and fast charge the batteries in the units.
Four Bay Ethernet Cradle Setup
After unpacking the unit:
• Visually inspect the unit for any damage.
• Install the IEC power cord and apply power.
A green indicator in the lower-right corner of the front panel lights up to indicate that power is present.
• Attach a CAT5 RJ45 network patch cable (supplied) between your network and the RJ45 jack on the rear of the cradle.
A green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector when a valid network link is established.
A user application must be loaded onto each Workabout Pro4 that utilizes the four bay Ethernet cradle for communication. When the network is connected and this application is loaded, the four bay Ethernet cradle is ready for use.
Four Bay Ethernet Cradle Indicators
The four bay Ethernet cradle is equipped with a power indicator LED and RJ45 link and traffic indicator LEDs.
When a valid network link is established, a green LED is illuminated next to the RJ45 connector.
Inserting a Workabout Pro4 in the Four Bay Ethernet Cradle
• Slide the unit into the cradle portion of the four bay Ethernet cradle until lightly latched.
The hand-held detects that it is in a four bay Ethernet cradle and momentarily displays the appropriate icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen – . The LED on the hand-held unit lights up to show it has external power and may start charging the battery.
Interaction with the Workabout Pro4 while in the four bay Ethernet cradle is a function of the user application software used to communicate with the host network.
Network Access
The four bay Ethernet cradle has one 10/100 Ethernet port. You can insert up to four hand-held units. The hand-helds are connected to an internal USB hub. The hand-held unit automatically detects insertion into a four bay Ethernet cradle and loads the appropriate drivers to communicate with the USB/Ethernet converters.
Network Addressing
Although the USB converters have fixed Ethernet MAC addresses, there is generally no correlation between these addresses and a specific hand-held. The host application uses standard TCP/IP protocol to name, locate and communicate with a specific Workabout Pro4 on the network.
If a link is established between a Workabout Pro4 and a host, the application on the host and on the hand-held must have a recovery mechanism in the event that the Workabout Pro4 is removed from the cradle and the link is interrupted.
Battery Charging – LED Behaviour
The four bay Ethernet cradle supplies DC power to enable the Workabout Pro4 internal fast charger. Charge status is displayed on the hand-held LED – the LED turns red while the battery is being charged and turns green once the charge is complete. If the battery is fully charged when the unit is inserted in the cradle, the
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 19
LED flashes red for less than a second and then turns green. Battery charging continues whether the Workabout Pro4 is switched on or off.
It can take up to 4 hours to fully charge the internal battery.
Troubleshooting
The indicators, applications and drivers required to use and monitor the cradle are installed on the Workabout
Pro4 – no indicators or applications are present on the cradle itself.
Network Link Unsuccessful
If a network link fails, the Workabout Pro4 application alerts the operator that the link was unsuccessful.
Hand-Held LED does not Light when Docked
• Check that the four bay Ethernet cradle has power – is the Power LED on the cradle illuminated?
• Try inserting the Workabout Pro4 in another well in the four bay Ethernet cradle.
• Check for dirt or contamination on the docking contacts at the bottom of the Workabout Pro4. Wipe the contacts with a damp cloth if necessary.
• Check the pogo pins inside the cradle for dirt. Gently wipe with a damp cloth if they appear to be dirty or discoloured.
• Check that the pogo pins are not bent or damaged.
• Remove and reinsert the Workabout Pro4 in the cradle, and check that the latch is holding the unit in place
(the pogo pins must be compressed for proper contact).
• Make certain that the battery installed in the Workabout Pro4 is not defective.
Four Slot Battery Charger
The four slot battery charger is designed to charge up to four Lithium Ion batteries at one time.
Charging the Battery
• Slide the battery into a charge well, aligning the contacts on the battery with the contacts in the charge well.
Battery Charge Duration
A fully discharged battery can take up to 4 hours to charge. The four slot battery charger stops applying power to the battery when it is fully charged – there is no risk of overcharge if the battery remains in the charge well.
The 75% charge indicator is handy if you need a quick recharge – a quick charge often takes less than one hour.
5 - 20 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Charge Indicators – The LEDs
Each battery charge well is equipped with an LED to indicate the charge status of the battery. When a battery is inserted in the charger, the colour and behaviour of the LED associated with the charge well in use indicates the status of the charge. Refer to the table below the heading
“Charger LED Indicators” on page 5-15
for details.
Troubleshooting
Excessive Charge Duration
The charger is equipped with a recalibration function – a function that fully discharges and then fully recharges the battery. This process is necessary to recalibrate the battery capacity gauge internal to the battery. The charger attempts recalibration when:
• the battery capacity is at less than 30%,
and
• the battery has undergone more than 40 partial charge cycles since the last full discharge.
Indicator Flashing Red
If the indicator flashes red:
• Remove all batteries and disconnect the mains power cable.
• Wait at least 20 seconds, and then plug the cable in again.
If any of the charge well LEDs continue to flash red, the charger is defective and requires service. If all indicators are flashing red, there is a power supply problem and the charger requires service.
Power LED Does Not Light Up
• Remove all batteries, and unplug the charger.
• Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power.
• Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger, and check it for damage.
• Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet.
If the power LED still does not light up:
• Unplug the mains cable, and check the fuse at the rear of the charger.
If the fuse appears to be intact, the charger requires service.
Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed
• Remove the battery, and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge well.
• Reinstall the battery, and check that it is fully seated in the charger well.
• Inspect the charge well contacts for damage (are they bent, flattened, twisted or broken).
• Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger well.
• Reconnect the mains power cable, and check that the charger well indicator flashes at power up.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 21
The Vehicle Cradle
The vehicle cradle is a highly ruggedized, single station cradle. Although it provides quick insertion and removal, the cradle holds the Workabout Pro4 securely even when operated in high vibration environments.
The model number for vehicle cradles varies depending on the type of hand-held:
• Workabout Pro4 Long
• Workabout Pro4 Short
A port replicator option is available for powered vehicle cradles. Refer to
“The Port Replicator” on page 5-24
for details.
Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations
IMPORTANT
Shock and vibration specifications for the Workabout Pro4 are verified using
Motorola-approved RAM mounts and mounting hardware. Use of non-certified
Motorola mounting hardware is not recommended, and may void warranty coverage.
Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle, there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following: operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Motorola strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer.
Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices with loose cables.
Note also that for better protection, the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage.
Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access. In addition, for safety reasons, only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles. Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws.
The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use the four #8-32 threaded inserts on the rear of the unit. Bolts must not extend more than 10mm (3/8") into the cradle.
To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable, leave a 4" clearance at the bottom of the cradle.
Leave a 7" (minimum) clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the hand-held.
Also remember to leave at least a 3" clearance at the sides of the cradle to allow activation of the release knobs. Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location.
Mounting Template
The vehicle cradle is shipped with detailed mounting instructions including a drill template.
5 - 22 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Wiring Guidelines
Before installing cables between the cradle and other devices, review the following:
• Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring.
• Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.
• Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.
• Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their desired location, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled.
• Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid and other potential hazards.
• Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.
Using the Vehicle Cradle
If your Workabout Pro4 is equipped with a shoulder strap or cover, these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle. There is no need to remove hand straps, pistol grips or tethered devices from the unit.
• Slide the Workabout Pro4 into the cradle, and press firmly downward until it locks into place. On a vehicle, it’s a good idea to pull up on the Workabout Pro4 to be certain that it is secure.
• To remove the unit, press firmly on the RELEASE button on the front face of the unit until it releases from it latch. The hand-held will be slightly raised so that it can be removed.
Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle
Two latches in the cradle hold the Workabout Pro4 firmly in place. Although these latches are designed for robustness and endurance, they will wear over time and will no longer lock the hand-held securely in the cradle. For replacement parts and instructions contact Motorola. Partial disassembly is required.
Powered Cradle Installation in High Voltage Vehicles
Voltages exceeding 60VDC are considered hazardous. For powered cradle installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage, ensure the powered cradle power connector is mounted in a dry location on the vehicle, or that the connector is insulated with an appropriate waterproof material after installation. The connector must also be installed out of the vehicle operator’s reach. Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a hazardous situation resulting in serious injury or death.
Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 60VDC require special consideration.
Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles, it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator, and does not get exposed to water or other liquids. This can be accomplished in one of the following ways:
• Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle, away from the vehicle operator’s reach (perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing).
• Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material.
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 23
• Wrap the connector securely with a waterproof electrical tape in an area out of the vehicle operators reach.
All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle.
Powered Vehicle Cradle Installation
The powered cradle is designed to allow the Workabout Pro4 to be powered by a vehicle battery. The battery installed in the hand-held is also recharged by the vehicle battery. This option accepts DC power sources ranging from 9 to 20V, with optional pre-regulator.
The vehicle cradle can be ordered with the powered cradle option installed.
Applying a voltage greater than that specified or reversing or reversing polarity may result in permanent damage to the cradle power option and will void the product warranty.
Wiring Vehicle Power to the Cradle
An optional 1.8 meter (6 foot) extension power cable (CA1210) compatible with your powered vehicle cradle can be purchased from Motorola. This optional cable should be wired to a filtered, fused (maximum 10A) accessory supply on the vehicle. The power cradle draws no more than 8A (less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring, connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A.
The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black lead connects to the negative supply – this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body. The power cradle is fully isolated and can be used with both negative and positive chassis vehicles.
You may have the option of connecting power before or after the ‘key’ switch. It is preferable to wire the power cradle after the key switch – that is, it cannot be turned on without the key on. However, if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift, it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch.
A car lighter adaptor (CA3002) is another option to power the vehicle cradle.
Keep in mind that the Workabout Pro4 will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge.
If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440) must be added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable). Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly.
5 - 24 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
The Port Replicator
The port replicator (Model# WA4005-G1) is an optional accessory that allows tethered devices as well as mounted peripherals (e.g., bar code printers or weigh scales) to be attached to the vehicle cradle. The replicator can be used with or without the cradle power option.
The functionality of the Workabout Pro4 tether port is replicated into RS-232 serial interfaces by the port replicator. It provides the user with 3 DB9 serial interfaces as well as one Type B USB port (for connecting a
Host device).
Scanners and Imagers
The Workabout Pro4 supports a wide range of scanner/imager options to address a variety of user application requirements. Refer to Appendix B: “Imagers Applet”
and Appendix C: “Scanner Services” for details about
configuring the unit installed in your hand-held.
Scanners/imagers available for your hand-held include:
Scanner/Imager
SE4500
SE965
SE655
SE1524
1D/2D imager
1D laser scanner
1D imager
1D laser scanner
Description
It is critical that you review the safety information in the
Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer Regulatory &
Warranty Guide
, PN 8000296, before proceeding.
Scanning Techniques
For helpful hints, refer to “Scanning Techniques” on page 2-13
.
Troubleshooting
If the scanner is not working, refer to
“Troubleshooting” on page 2-13 .
Operating 1D Laser Scanners
For helpful scanning tips, refer to “Operating 1D Internal Laser Scanners” on page 2-13 .
Operating 2D Imagers
For helpful tips when using an imager, refer to
“Operating Internal 2D Imagers” on page 2-14 .
Peripheral Devices & Accessories 5 - 25
Bluetooth Peripherals
The Workabout Pro4 is equipped with a
Bluetooth
radio, making it is possible to communicate with a variety of
Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners, printers, and so on.
The range of the
Bluetooth
radio is limited to approximately 5 meters.
Motorola provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.
• GSM/GPRS universal handset
•
Bluetooth
printer
•
Bluetooth
headset
Keep in mind that
Bluetooth
and IEEE 802.11b/g radios both operate in the 2.4GHz band. Although the Workabout Pro4 includes features to minimize interference, performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously. Typically, when both radios operate in the hand-held at the same time, they cannot transmit simultaneously – this has a negative impact on overall system throughput. To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11g network, Motorola recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as printers and scanners).
Refer to
“Bluetooth Setup” on page 4-14
for information about setting up your
Bluetooth
devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your
Bluetooth
device to determine the method used to pair with the Workabout Pro4 host.
APPENDIX A PORT PINOUTS
Port Pinouts A - 3
LIF (Low Insertion Force) Pinout
8
9
10
11
12
6
7
4
5
2
3
1
PIN # Signal Name
Ground
Ground
USB Host Data Plus, For connecting USB devices
USB Host Data Minus, For connecting USB devices
USB Host Power, for powering USB devices (5V, 100mA Max)
DC Power in, for supplying power to Workabout Pro4/ charging battery (5V, 3A)
DC Power in, for supplying power to Workabout Pro4 / charging battery (5V, 3A)
LIF Detect, determines if a device is attached to the LIF
USB Device Data Minus, for operating the Workabout Pro4 as a USB device
USB Device Data Plus, for operating the Workabout Pro4 as a USB device
Ground
Ground
Tether Port Pinout
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
16
17
18
6
7
4
5
2
3
1
PIN # Signal Name
Ground
USB Data Plus (can be configured as Host or Device)
USB Data Minus (can be configured as Host or Device)
USB VBUS (can provide 5V, 100mA Max for powering USB Devices)
RS232 Tx data
RS232 Rx Data
Tether detect resistor ID. Determines what kind of device is attached to the Tether port
DC Power In
DC Power In
DC Power In
RS232 CTS
RS232 RTS
RS232 DSR
RS232 DTR
RS232 DCD
RS232 RI
Ground
Ground
A - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
PIN #
19
20
Ground
Ground
Signal Name
Battery Contact Pinout – WA3010
-
6
4
5
2
3
1
PIN # Signal Name
P-
DQ
TH (GND)
P+
PS
Plastic Rip
P-
Function
Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative
Maxim DS2762 Data
Ground
Power Pin for Battery Pack Positive
Power Switch Sensor
-
Power Pin for Battery Pack Negative
Positive Female Battery Connector
APPENDIX B DATAWEDGE
Where to Find More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
DataWedge B - 3
DataWedge
DataWedge is a Motorola mobile device application that reads data from input devices and sends it as keystrokes to consumer applications executing in the foreground on the mobile devices.
• Tap on
Start>Settings> System>DataWedge
icon.
Where to Find More Information
For DataWedge support, go to: www.motorolasolutions.com/support
APPENDIX C SCANNER SERVICES
Restoring Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Decoded (Motorola EMDK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Barcodes Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Barcode Symbologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Options Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Double Click Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Display Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Data Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Translations Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Case Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Ports Tab – Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10
Scanner Services C - 3
Scanner Services
IMPORTANT
The default barcode application is
DataWedge
. If you prefer to use the
Scanner Services
application, you’ll need to take a few extra steps to display this option. Follow the steps below.
• Tap on
Start>Settings>System
.
• Tap on the
TweakIt
icon. Under the
Advanced
tab, tap on
Advanced Services Settings
, and double-tap on
Scanner Services
.
• In the
Scanner Services
dialog box,
uncheck
Use DataWedge (Uncheck for Psion Legacy)
.
• Press and hold down the
[FN/BLUE]
and
[Power]
buttons to reset the unit.
The
Scanners
icon provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner configurations and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize.
• Tap on
Start>Settings> System>Scanners
icon.
The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit.
NOTE
To determine the type of scanner installed in your unit, tap on
Start>Setting>System>System Properties
icon.
All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes.
IMPORTANT
To enable a newly-installed scanner, press and hold down the [FN] key and the [Power] key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds.
Restoring Default Settings
If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes, the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter, sub-tree of parameters, or all scanner parameters.
• Press and hold the stylus on a symbology to display a pop up a menu.
C - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
• Choose
Default parameter
to reset only the parameter you selected, or choose
Default all settings
to reset all scanner parameters to default settings.
Decoded (Motorola EMDK)
This section describes the tabs used to configure this scanner type.
Barcodes Tab
Options
Laser On Time
The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between
5
and
99.
The value is measured in tenths of seconds.
Picklist Mode
Picklist mode lets you target a single barcode within a group. The bar code closest to the aiming cross hair is decoded.
Advanced Options
Scan Mode
This parameter sets the method of scanning to
Scan beam only
.
Aim Duration
This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping. When you double-tap on this parameter, a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from
0
to
30
(0 to 3 sec.). A value of
0
(zero) disables the aiming-dot.
Linear Security Level
This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your barcode quality. There are four levels of decode security for linear code types (e.g., Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5). Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of barcode quality. As security levels increase, the scanner’s decode speed decreases.
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from
1
to
4
.
Scanner Services C - 5
Linear security level
1
specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded:
Codabar
MSI Plessey
D 5 of 5
I 2 of 5
All
4 or less
8 or less
8 or less
Linear security level
2
specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded.
Linear security level
3
specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded. The following codes must be read three times:
MSI Plessey
D 2 of 5
I 2 of 5
4 or less
8 or less
8 or less
Linear security level
4
requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded.
Use LED lighting
This option enables and disables the illumination LEDs. In bright light, for example outdoors, the LEDs can remain off saving power.
Barcode Symbologies
The table below list the available symbologies.
IMPORTANT
To improve the decode speed and performance, enable only those codes that are required by the application.
EAN 8
EAN 13
UPC-A
UPC-E
UPC-E1
UPC/EAN
Code 11 (disabled)
Code 39
Code 93 (disabled)
Code 128
Motorola EMDK Barcode Symbologies
TLC-39
Trioptic (disabled)
PDF-417
Macro PDF-417
Micro PDF-417
Macro-Micro PDF-417
2D Aztec (disabled)
2D Data Matrix
2D Maxicode
2D QR Code
C - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Codabar
Composite AB (disabled)
Motorola EMDK Barcode Symbologies
Postal: Australian (disabled)
Postal: Canadian (disabled)
Composite C (disabled)
Code 11 (disabled)
Discrete 2 of 5 (disabled)
GS1 DataBar (disabled)
Postal: Japanese (disabled)
Postal: Kix (disabled)
Postal: Korean (disabled)
Postal: PlaNET (disabled)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (disabled)
Matrix 2 of 5 (disabled)
MSI Plessey (disabled)
Postal: PostNET (disabled)
Postal: Royal Mail (disabled)
Options Tab
The
Options
tab allows you to tailor the double-click parameters, the display options associated with your scanner, and data handling.
Double Click Parameters
Click Time (msec)
This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. The allowable range is 0 to 1000. A value of zero disables this feature.
A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the “Click Data” parameter. If a value is assigned for the “Click Data” parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the
“Click Data” value rather than initiating a scan.
Click Data
For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your Workabout Pro4 following a double-click. A dialog box appears, asking that you press the key you want to insert. The ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Scanner Services C - 7
Display Parameters
Scan Result
When this parameter is enabled, the type of barcode and the result of the scan appear on the screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner button is pressed. When the button is released, this information is cleared from the screen.
Scan Indicator
When this parameter is enabled, the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated.
Scan Result Time (msec)
The value assigned to the “Scan Result Time (sec)” parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen. Time is measured in seconds, and a value of “0” (zero) disables the parameter. When you choose this option, a dialog box appears where you can enter a value.
NOTE
To remove the scan result from the screen before the “Result Time” has expired, point the scanner away from the barcode and press the trigger.
Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep
These parameters determine whether or not the Workabout Pro4 emits an audible scanner beep when a good
(successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed, the number of vibrates, the duration of the vibrate, and so on. Set these parameters to tailor the behaviour of this parameter.
Multiple Beep Tones
This parameter determines whether or not multiple beeps will be allowed.
Good and Bad Scan Vibrates
These parameters determine whether or not the Workabout Pro4 will vibrate (rather than beep) when a good (successful) scan or a bad (unsuccessful) scan is performed. Set these parameters to either
on
to enable the beeper or
off
to disable it. You can further refine how you want the vibrations to behave, specifying the following: Number of Vibrates, Duration of Vibrate (in milliseconds), and Pause between
Vibrates (in milliseconds).
Soft Scan Timeout
This parameter is used by the Mobile Devices SDK Scan function (soft-scan: starting a scan session via the
SDK function, instead of a physical user trigger press). The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft-scan timeout from 1 to 10 sec. (default is 3 sec.).
Scan Log File
If this parameter is enabled, the input barcode and the modified/translated output barcode are logged in the file
\Flash Disk (or \Application)\ScanLog.txt. Keep in mind that if the “Scan Log File” is enabled, there is a slight performance effect when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage.
Data Handling
This option allows you to choose the code page your Workabout Pro4 will use to display data – Default Local
ASCII or ISO-8859-1 Latin 1.
Codepage:
Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can define the code page your Workabout Pro4 will use
– either
Default Local ASCII
or
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1
C - 8 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
If you choose
Default Local ASCII
, the code page of the local OS is used. For example, if the local OS uses double-byte Chinese characters, choosing this option will filter data through the local ASCII of that OS and display it accurately, in this example, using double-byte characters.
If you choose
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1
, data will be displayed according to the character mapping of this Latin 1 code page, ignoring the local OS code page.
Data Transmission:
Tapping on this option displays a window in which you can how data will be handled – either
Paste data
or
Wedge data
.
If
Paste data
is enabled (highlighted), the barcode output is copied to the system clipboard and then automatically pasted to an application.
If
Wedge data
is enabled, each character that composes the barcode data is turned into a keyboard sequence that is transmitted to the cursor location of the current application – that is, to the application, it looks like the barcode data was typed on the keyboard.
NOTE
The default
Paste data
option is a faster method of data transmission.
Translations Tab
The
Translations
tab allows you to define up to 10 cases, each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order.
Only one case will be applied to a barcode and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successful – if a rule within a case fails, the entire case fails.
• In the
Translations
tab, double-tap on a
Case #
to create rules.
• Tap on the
No rule
drop-down menu to display the rules.
Scanner Services C - 9
When you choose a rule, an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule.
Case Rules
The case rules are defined as follows:
•
No rule
– ignored.
•
Match at index
– matches the match string at a specified index.
•
Match and replace at index
– matches the match string at a specified index and replaces/changes it.
•
Replace at index
– replaces/changes unspecified data in a given range.
•
Add barcode prefix/suffix
– adds a global prefix or suffix.
•
Verify barcode size
– verifies the barcode size. This rule should generally be assigned first, before creating subsequent rules.
•
Search and replace
– replaces all instances of the match string. (Note that this rule cannot fail.)
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creating subsequent rules. For example, if the barcode size is important, it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied.
enabled. This is useful if a case fails, and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing.
C - 10 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Ports Tab – Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6)
Port Replicator Port A (COM5) and Port B (COM6) are standard RS-232 DE-9 DTE ports on the Workabout
Pro4 port replicator module, available on some cradle types.
Enabled
This parameter must be set to
on
in order for Workabout Pro4 to recognize the device connected to the Port
Replicator 9-pin (COM5).
Power (COM6 only)
Pin 9 on Workabout Pro4 COM6 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to OFF. This parameter must be set to
on
to enable power to a Vehicle cradle.
Baud
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can choose an appropriate rate of data transfer.
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte. Most devices use 8-bit data bytes. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits.
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port replicator port.
Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose the appropriate parity.
Scanner Services C - 11
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits — 1, 1.5 or 2 — used for asynchronous communication.
Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence
If a SICK scanner connected to an Workabout Pro4 port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner
on
and another to trigger the scanner
off
, the
Trigger On Sequence
and
Trigger Off Sequence
parameters allow you to define these serial streams.
Double-tapping on
Trigger On Sequence
or
Trigger Off Sequence
displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements.
These parameters work in conjunction with
Manage Triggers
sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned. For example, suppose you launch
Manage Triggers
and choose
Decoded Scanner
as the ‘module to trigger’. Next, you assign a ‘trigger key’ — for this example, . (period). To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the
on
and
off
function of the ‘trigger key’, enter a hex value in the
Trigger On
Sequence
and the
Trigger Off Sequence
fields. When you press the trigger key, the
Trigger On Sequence
is sent and when you release the trigger key, the
Trigger Off Sequence
is sent, turning the trigger key
on
and
off
.
APPENDIX D INTERNAL IMAGER &
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
DInternal Imager & Scanner Specifications
SE965 Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
SE655 Decode Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
SE1524ER Decode Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
SE4500SR Decode Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-10
Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications D - 3
This appendix lists specifications for the following internal scanners. For a current list of model numbers and descriptions for Workabout Pro4 scanner pod and back cover kits, please contact your Motorola representative or go to: http://www.motorolasolutions.com/US-EN/Product+Lines/Psion/?WT.mc_id=psion_us_p_handheld
SE965 1D Laser Scanner
Dimensions
Weight
Configuration
Interface
Scan Angle
SE965
0.46 in. H x 0.85 in. W x 0.61 in. D
11.75 mm H x 21.6 mm W x 15.5 mm D
0.27 oz./7.6 g
Decoded
SSI Control over TTL Serial on a 12-pin ZIF connector
Wide (default): 47 ° (typical)
Medium: 35° (typical)
Narrow: 10° (typical)
Skew Tolerance
Pitch Tolerance
Roll Tolerance
Specular Dead Zone
Optical Resolution
Scan Repetition Rate
Print Contrast
Note: The SE965 scan engine does not require margin on either side of the barcode to decode. The 47° scan line provides identical scanning performance to older scan engines with a scan line of 53°.
± 40° from normal
± 65° from normal
± 35° from vertical
± 8°
0.005 in. minimum element width
104 (± 12) scans/sec (bidirectional)
Ambient Lighting Tolerance
Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at
650 nm
Tolerant to typical artificial indoor and natural outdoor (direct sunlight) lighting conditions. Fluorescent, Incandescent,
Mercury Vapor, Sodium Vapor, LED
5
. 450 Ft Candles (4,844
Lux) Sunlight 8000 Ft Candles (86,111 Lux)
Operating Temperature -22° F to 140° F/ -30° C to 60° C
Storage Temperature -40° F to 158° F/ -40° C to 70° C
D - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
SE965 Decode Zones
Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications D - 5
SE655 1D Imager
Parameter
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
Specifications
Weight
Interface
Performance
Characteristics
Scan angle
Field of view
0.3 in. H x 0.94 in. W x 0.47 in. DUMTS/HSPA+: Five band, 800/850/900/1900/2100MHz
7.7 mm H x 23.8 mm W x 12.0 mm D
<7 grams
Serial
Illumination
Skew tolerance
Pitch tolerance
Roll tolerance
53.3° ± 3°
Horizontal: 53° ± 3°
Vertical: 0.4°
LED 630 ± 30 nm
± 30° from normal
± 65° from normal
± 25° from vertical
Optical resolution
Scan repetition rate
5 mil
Nominally 50 scans/second
Minimum print contrast 20% MRD measured at 630 nm
Power on to first scan 300 milliseconds
User Environment
Ambient light 0 ft. candles (0 Lux) to 10,000 ft.(110,000 Lux)
Operating temperature -4° to 122° F/-20° to 50° C
Storage temperature
Humidity
Power
-40° to 158° F/-40° to 70° C
Operating: 5% – 95% non-condensing
Shock
Regulatory
Camera/Aim Input Voltage: 3.3V ± 0.3V
Camera/Aim Operating Current: 165mA
Low Power Current: 115ìA typical
Power Supply Noise: 100mV p-p max.
2000 G
Classification
Electrical Safety
EMI/RFI
Environmental
Intended for use in CDRH Class I/IEC
Class 1 devices
UL, VDE, and CUL recognized
EMI- FCC Part 15 Class B, ICES-003 Class B, CISPR Class B, Japan VCCI Class B
RoHS Compliant
D - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
SE655 Decode Ranges
Code 128
5 mil
Code 39
5 mil
Code 39
7.5 mil
100%
UPC-A
Code 39
20 mil
Near
Far
Near
Far
Near
Far
Near
Far
Near
Far
Typical
2.75 in./70 mm
8.25 in./210 mm
2.25 in./57 mm
9.75 in./248 mm
1.50 in./38 mm
12.75 in./324 mm
2.00* in./51 mm
15.75 in./400 mm
1.50* in./38 mm
24.0 in./610 mm
Guaranteed
3.90 in./99 mm
6.25 in./159 mm
3.15 in./80 mm
8.00 in./203 mm
2.50 in./64 mm
10.25 in./260 mm
2.25 in./57 mm
11.00 in./279 mm
2.00* in./51 mm
18.25 in./464 mm
Note: The distances marked with an asterisk (*) are a result of the field of view (FOW) limitation.
SE1524ER – 1D Laser Scanner
Parameter Specification
Type
Light Source
Laser Class 2
Visible Laser Diode 650 nm
Scan Rate 35 (± 5) scans/sec (bi-directional).
Scan Angle/Field of View 13.5° ± 0.7°
Scan Patterns
Minimum Print Contrast
Linear
Minimum 25% absolute dark/light reflectance measured at
650 nm.
Symbologies UPC/EAN, Code 128, UCC.EAN128, RSS, Code 39, Code
93, I 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, MSI.
Programmable Parameters Laser On Time, Aim Duration, Power Mode, Trigger Mode,
Bi-directional Redundancy, Symbology types/lengths, Data formatting.
Ambient Light Artificial: 450 ft. candles (4,844 Lux)
Sunlight: 4,000 ft. candles (86,112 Lux).
Laser Output Power (peak) 1.26 mW
Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications D - 7
SE1524ER Decode Zones
SE1524ER Decode Zone A (Short Range, Small Codes)
SE1524ER Decode Zone B (Long Range, Large Codes)
D - 8 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
SE4500SR – 1D/2D Imager
Parameter
Power Requirements - Input
Voltage
3.3 V ± 0.3 V at 23° C
Specification
Operating Mode Supply Currents (conditions VCC=VCC_SENSOR=VCC_ILLUM = 3.3VDC) (at 23°
C):
Low Power
Idle
500 µA
18 mA
Image Acquisition
Illumination Enabled
80 mA
200 mA
Maximum Operating Current
Maximum Sensor Power Supply
Noise* (at 23° C)
250 mA (aiming on during exposure, illumination enabled)
100 mVp-p (3.3 V, 10 Hz - 100 kHz) for decoding
30 mVp-p (3.3 V, 10 Hz - 100 kHz) for image capture
Optical Resolution SR focus: 5.0 mil (Code 39), 6.7 mil (PDF417)
*For better image quality in image capture applications, use an additional filter on VCC_SENSOR.
For additional performance improvement, provide a separately regulated 3.3 V supply for the sensor.
Specular Dead Zone:
Illumination On
Illumination Off
Up to 20º depending on target distance and substrate glossiness
Skew Tolerance
Pitch Angle
None
± 60º
± 60º
360º Roll
Ambient Light Immunity
(Sunlight)
9000 ft. candles (96,900 lux)
Imaging Sensor:
Image Resolution
Grey Scale
Field of View (FOV)
752 H x 480 V pixels (Wide VGA)
256 levels (8 bits per pixel)
SE4500-SR: 39.6º horizontal, 25.7º vertical
Focusing Distance from Front of
Engine (SR)
8 in. / 20.3 cm
Aiming Element:
Visible Laser Diode (VLD)
Central Dot Optical Power
Pattern Angle
655 ± 10 nm
0.6 mW (typical)
40º horizontal, 30º vertical
Internal Imager & Scanner Specifications D - 9
Parameter
Illumination System:
LEDs
Pattern Angle
Shock
Vibration
ESD
Laser Safety Class
LED Class
Maximum Engine Dimensions
Weight
Electrical Interface
Specification
625 ± 5 nm (dominant wavelength)
60º x 40º at 80% center intensity
2000 G ± 5% applied via any mounting surface at -30º and 55º C for a period of 0.85 ± 0.05 msec
2500 G ± 5% applied via any mounting surface at 23º C for a period of
0.85 ± 0.05 msec
Unpowered SE4500 withstands a random vibration along each of the X,
Y, and Z axes for a period of one hour per axis (6 G rms), defined as follows:
20 to 80 Hz Ramp up at 0.04 G
2
/Hz at 3 dB/octave
80 to 350 Hz 0.04 G
2
/Hz
350 Hz to 2 kHzRamp down at 0.04 G
2
/Hz at 3 dB/octave
± 2 kV @ connector
CDRH / IEC Class 2
IEC Class 1M
11.8 mm H x 21.50 mm W x 16.3 mm D
0.46 in. H x 0.85 in.W x 0.64 in. D
8.0 grams (0.28 oz)
21 pin 0.3 mm pitch ZIF connector
D - 10 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
SE4500SR Decode Zone
SE4500-SR
*
5 mil Code 39
2.1
7.5
6.67 mil PDF417
3.4
7.1
7.5 mil Code 39
10.6
In.
cm
0
0
*
*
1.6
10 mil PDF417
10.1
13 mil (100% UPC)
15 mil PDF417
*
2.8
15 mil Data Matrix
12.4
14.7
15.5
20 mil Code 39
5
12.7
10
25.4
15
38.1
Depth of Field
20
50.8
24.7
25
63.5
in.
0
9
4.5
cm
22.9
11.4
0
4.5 11.4
9 22.9
e l d i
F o f
W i d t h
APPENDIX E WORKABOUT PRO4
SPECIFICATIONS
EWorkabout Pro4 Specifications
The Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer (7528 Long and 7528 Short) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Regulatory Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Lithium-ion Battery – 4400 mAh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
802.11a/b/g/n Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Cinterion PHS8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-10
Workabout Pro4 Specifications E - 3
The Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer (7528 Long and 7528 Short)
NOTE
Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice.
Hardware
Dimensions and Weight
7528 Long
• 223 mm x 75/100 mm x 31/42 mm (8.78 x 2.95/3.94 x 1.22 x 1.65 inches)
• 526g (18.6 oz)
7528 Short
• 200 mm x 75/100 mm x 31/42 mm (7.87 x 2.95/3.94 x 1.22/1.65 inches)
• 461g (16.2 oz)
Processor and Memory
• CPU: Sitara™ AM37x ARM Cortex™-A8 processor
• Memory: 512 MB RAM/4GB Flash
Operating System
• Microsoft Windows
®
Embedded Hand-Held 6.5
Power Management
• Battery Pack: 4400 mAh Lithium-ion
• Super capacitor power backup
Expansion Ports
• Micro SD slot
• 100-Pin Expansion Interface
• Dedicated USB port
• Audio port
Camera (optional)
• Optional colour, 8Mpixel, autofocus, 4X digital zoom, Bright LED flash, video capable
Environmental
• Standard operating temperature: -20°C to +50°C (-4°F to +122°F)
• Storage temperature: -40°C to +60°C (-40°F to +140°F)
• Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing
• IP Sealing: IP65, IEC 60529
• Drop rating: 1.5 m (5 ft), 26 drops to polished concrete (powered with options and accessories), multiple
1.8m (6 ft) drops to polished concrete
E - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Regulatory Approvals
• Worldwide Safety, EMC, RF, Laser approvals
• CE Mark
• E Mark (vehicle cradles)
• RoHS compliant
• WEEE compliant
• REACH compliant
Battery Specifications
Lithium-ion Battery – 4400 mAh
Electrical Specifications
NOTE
The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0° to +40°C unless otherwise stated.
3
4
1
2
5
8
9
10
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
Item Description
Interface Chipset
Rated Voltage
Rated Capacity
Rated Charge Current
Charge Voltage
Discharge Cut-Off Voltage
Charge Method
Discharge Current
Internal Resistance
Charging Temperature
3.7 V
1.2 A
Specifications
Maxim DS2762
4400 mAh
4.2 +/- 0.05 V
-
Remark
Typical
Typical
Maximum
2.6 V
Constant voltage Current limited
-
Maximum
Typical
0.5C (-20°C to 60° C)
200 mW
0 to 40
Typical
Maximum
Typical
Battery Pack Electrical Specifications
NOTE
The electrical specifications apply for ambient temperature TAMB of 0° to +40°C unless otherwise stated.
Item Description
Over voltage detection voltage
Charge enable
Under voltage detection voltage
Over current detection current
Short-circuit detection current
Minimum
4.325 V
4.10 V
2.5 V
2.97 A
9.9A
Typical
4.350 V
4.15 V
2.6 V
3.17 A
13.33A
Maximum
4.375 V
4.20 V
2.7 V
3.36 A
16.83A
Workabout Pro4 Specifications E - 5
Item
8
9
6
7
10
11
Description
Short-circuit detection voltage
Over voltage delay time
Under voltage delay time
Over current delay time
Short-circuit delay time
Recovery charge current
Safety Data
Description
Short Circuit Test
Over Charging Test
Reverse Charging Test
150m V
0.8s
90 ms
5 ms
160 µs
0.5 mA
200 mV
1 s
100 ms
10 ms
200 µs
1 mA
250 mV
1.2 s
110 ms
20 ms
240 µs
2 mA
Condition
After a standard charge, short terminals and discharge for 1 hr.
Test Condition/Result
Protection circuit board to operate.
After a standard charge, charge continuously at 4.2V and 4A for 8 hrs.
No explosion, fire, smoke, or leakage.
Protection circuit board to operate.
No explosion, fire, smoke, or leakage.
After a standard discharge, reverse-charge continuously at 4.2V and
4A for 8hrs.
Protection circuit board to operate.
No explosion, fire, smoke, or leakage.
1
Item
Safety License
Licenses
UL 1642
2
3
4
UL 2054
89/336 EEC-EMC directive
RoHS Directive
Standard
The lithium-ion cell has been listed and pass the UL1642 standard by UL Lab.
File No. MH12383
The battery pack is in the process to apply the UL 2054 battery standard. File
No. MH29921.
The battery pack is in the process to apply the below standard:
-EN55022 -LVD 72/23 EEC -EN55024 -EN61326
The materials of battery pack are used in accordance with the European
RoHS directive.
Drop
Environmental Test
Description Test References
(mechanical)
Storage at high temp.
Storage at low temp.
EN60068-2-2 Test
EN60068-2-1 Test
Test Condition/Result
Drop sample battery on all faces from height of 1.2 meters onto concrete floor.
No explosion, fire, vent, leakage and the open circuit voltage higher than 3.7V.
+60°C dry for 240 hours
No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.
-20°C dry for 240 hours
No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.
E - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Description
Storage at high temp. and high humidity
Test References
IEC68-2-3 Test
Storage temp. cycling IEC68-2-14 Test
Vibration resistance
Impact shock resistance
ESD protection
-
-
BS2011 Part 2.1
FDC (IEC68-2-37)
Test Condition/Result
+40°C at 90%RH for 240 hours.
No explosion, fire, vent or leakage.
+60°C (2C) for 1 hour (T1), -20oC (2C) for 1 hour. 3 minutes Max allowed for change between T1 and T2.
Cycle 10 times
No explosion, no fire, no vent, and no leakage.
After standard charge, tested under the following conditions: Random vibration
5Hz-500Hz ASD 0.02g2/Hz in 3 axis for 15 mins. After which, carry out a standard discharge, charge, discharge. No parting joints/cracks or damage to connectors. No leakage or critical damage.
3 cycles of 50G 11ms, 1/2 sine pulse acceleration applied in 6 directions. 18 shocks total.
Accordance with EN61000-4-8
Wireless Radios
802.11a/b/g/n Radio
NOTE
A GPS/WiFi Diversity Kit, Model Number RA3052 is an available option for this radio.
Parameter
Form Factor
Antenna Port
Antenna Type
Antenna Gain
Transmit Power
Sub-parameter Specifications
Embedded surface mount module, 15.0 x 15.0 mm
* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth V4.0 LE radio
2x U.FL jacks. Switched diversity.
802.11a/b/g/n
802.11a/b/g/n PCB substrate patch antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz @ <2:1 VSWR and 5150-5850MHz @ <2.5:1 VSWR.
802.11b/g/n
802.11a/n
802.11b
802.11g
802.11a
* Number of antenna: one or two, depending on configuration.
5 dBi
4 dBi
+20 dBm max (depending on region)
+19 dBm max (depending on region)
+17.5 dBm max (depending on region)
802.11n (2.4 GHz) +17 dBm max (depending on region)
802.11n (5 GHz) +17.5 dBm max (depending on region)
Workabout Pro4 Specifications E - 7
Parameter
RX Sensitivity
(hardware)
Data Rates
EVM
WiFi-BT
Co-existent
Sub-parameter
Frequency Range 802.11b/g/n
Channels
802.11a/n
802.11b/g/n
802.11a/n
802.11b
802.11g
Specifications
2400-2483.5 MHz
5150-5350 MHz, 5480-5720 MHz and 5725-5845 MHz
1 to 14.
Up to 14 channels (depending on country).
Only 3 channels are non-overlapping.
36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64
100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140
149, 153, 157, 161, 165
Up to 24 channels (depending on country). All channels are non-overlapping.
-86 dBm @ 11 Mbps,
-94 dBm @ 1 Mbps
-73 dBm @ 54 Mbps,
-89 dBm @ 6 Mbps
802.11a
-71 dBm @ 54 Mbps,
-87 dBm @ 6 Mbps
802.11n (2.4 GHz) -71 dBm @ MCS7 (65 Mbps),
-88 dBm @ MCS0 (6.5Mbps)
802.11n (5 GHz) -68 dBm @ MCS7 (65 Mbps),
-87 dBm @ MCS0 (6.5Mbps)
802.11b
802.11a/g
802.11n
802.11b
802.11g
1,2,5.5,11 Mbps
6,9,12,18,24,36,48,54 Mbps
6.5,13,19.5,26,39,52,58.5,65 Mbps
35% max
802.11a
-25 dB max @ 54 Mbps,
-5 dB max @ 6 Mbps
-25 dB max @ 54 Mbps,
-5 dB max @ 6 Mbps
802.11n (2.4 GHz) -28 dB max @ MCS7 (65 Mbps),
-5 dB max @ MCS0 (6.5 Mbps)
802.11n (5 GHz) -28 dB max @ 54 Mbps,
-5 dB max @ 6 Mbps
PTA This software feature is not enabled in Workabout Pro4.
E - 8 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Cinterion PHS8-P GSM/GPRS/EDGE/UMTS/HSPA+ Radio
Specifications Parameter
General
Frequency bands
GSM class
Output power (according to Release 99)
GSM/GPRS/EDGE: Quad band, 850/900/1800/1900 MHz
UMTS/HSPA+: Five band, 800/850/900/1900/2100 MHz
Small MS
Class 4 (+33 dBm ±2 dB) for EGSM850
Class 4 (+33 dBm ±2 dB) for EGSM900
Class 1 (+30 dBm ±2 dB) for GSM1800
Class 1 (+30 dBm ±2 dB) for GSM1900
Class E2 (+27 dBm ±3 dB) for GSM 850 8-PSK
Class E2 (+27 dBm ±3 dB) for GSM 900 8-PSK
Class E2 (+26 dBm +3 /-4 dB) for GSM 1800 8-PSK
Class E2 (+26 dBm +3 /-4 dB) for GSM 1900 8-PSK
Class 3 (+24 dBm +1/-3 dB) for UMTS 2100, WCDMA FDD Bd I
Class 3 (+24 dBm +1/-3 dB) for UMTS 1900,WCDMA FDD Bd II
Class 3 (+24 dBm +1/-3 dB) for UMTS 900, WCDMA FDD Bd VIII
Class 3 (+24 dBm +1/-3 dB) for UMTS 850, WCDMA FDD Bd V
Class 3 (+24 dBm +1/-3 dB) for UMTS 800, WCDMA FDD Bd VI
HSPA
3GPP Release 6, 7 DL 14.4Mbps, UL 5.7Mbps
UE CAT. [1-6], 11, 12 supported
Compressed mode (CM) supported according to 3GPP TS25.212
UMTS features
3GPP Release 6, 7 DL 14.4Mbps, UL 5.7Mbps
UE CAT. 1-12 supported
Compressed mode (CM) supported according to 3GPP TS25.212
GSM GPRS/EGPRS
Workabout Pro4 Specifications E - 9
Parameter
Data transfer
Specifications
GPRS:
- Multislot Class 10
- Full PBCCH support
- Mobile Station Class B
- Coding Scheme 1 - 4
EGPRS:
- Multislot Class 10
- EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK
- Downlink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9
- Uplink coding schemes - CS 1-4, MCS 1-9
- SRB loopback and test mode B
- 8-bit, 11-bit RACH
- PBCCH support
- 1 phase/2 phase access procedures
- Link adaptation and IR
- NACC, extended UL TBF
SMS
- Mobile Station Class B
CSD:
- V.110, RLP, non-transparent
- 14.4 kbps
- USSD
Point-to-point MT and MO
Cell Broadcast
Text and PDU mode
GNSS Features
Protocol
Modes
NMEA
Standalone GNSS
Assisted GNSS
- Control plane-E911
General
- User plane- gpsOneXTRA™
GPS and GLONOSS
Power saving modes
Software
AT commands Hayes, 3GPP TS 27.007 and 27.005, and proprietary Cinterion Wireless Modules commands
SIM Application Toolkit SAT Release 99
E - 10 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Audio
Parameter
Interface
Antenna
USB
UICC interface
Special features
Phonebook
Antenna
Audio speech codecs
GSM: AMR, EFR, FR, HR
3GPP: AMR echo cancellation, noise suppression
Specifications
50Ohms. Main GSM/UMTS antenna, UMTS diversity antenna, GNSS antenna (passive)
USB 2.0 High Speed (480Mbit/s) device interface, Full Speed(12Mbit/s) compliant
Supported chip cards: UICC/SIM/USIM 3V, 1.8V
SIM and phone
SAIC (Single Antenna Interference Cancellation) / DARP (Downlink Advanced Receiver
Performance)
RX diversity (receiver type 3i-16-QAM)
Bluetooth
Radio
Parameter
Manufacturer
Form Factor
Antenna Port
Antenna Type
Antenna Gain
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
Channels
RX Sensitivity
Data Rates
IEEE802.11
Coexistence
Specifications
Motorola Solutions Inc., PN 21-148603-02
Embedded surface mount module, 15 x 15 mm
* This is a combo module containing both Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth
V4.0 LE radio
U.FL jack
Surface mount PIFA antenna. Covers 2400-2484 MHz @ <2.5:1 VSWR
0 dBi
1 mW (0 dBm)
2.400-2.4835 GHz
79
-91 dBm @ 1Mbps
-83 dBm @ 3Mbps
V1.2=732.2 kbps and 57.6 kbps asymmetric, 433.9 kbps symmetric
V2.0=2 & 3 Mbps
Co-existent is realized through antenna isolation.
SW co-existent disabled in WAP4.
APPENDIX F WIRELESS ZERO CONFIG
SETTINGS
FWireless Zero Config Settings
Configuring the Unit Using Wireless Zero Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Wireless Zero Config Settings F - 3
Wireless Zero Config
This appendix describes how to set up your radio using
Windows Wireless Zero Configuration
– an alternative to the
Fusion Wireless Companion
.
NOTE
For details about using
Fusion Wireless Companion
, refer to “Fusion Wireless Companion - Setting Up the 802.11a/b/g/n Radio” on page 4-31 .
• In the
Today
screen, tap on the
Fusion
softkey at the bottom of the screen.
• In the
Fusion Launch
screen, tap on
Options
.
• Choose
WLAN Management
from the drop-down menu, and tap on
Save
• Tap on the radio button next to
Windows Manages WLAN
, and tap on
Save
and
OK
.
• Press and hold down the
[Power]
button and the
[FN/BLUE]
key to reset the unit.
Wireless Zero Config
will be listed in the
Today
screen.
• Tap on
Wireless Zero Config
in the
Today
screen.
F - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Configuring the Unit Using Wireless Zero Config
• In the
Wi-Fi
screen, tap on
Add New...
.
• Type the appropriate
SSID
(Service Set Identifier) in the
Network name:
dialog box. The
Network name
field can contain a maximum of 32 characters.
• Choose the type of connection in the drop-down menu next to
Connects to
.
• Tap on
Next
.
• In the Configure Network Authentication screen, choose the appropriate
Authentication
,
Data Encryption
,
Network key
and
Key index
for your network. These are outlined below. Keep in mind that these options vary depending on the type of
Authentication
chosen.
•
Authentication
: Several subtypes of network authentication services are supported: Open, Shared, WPA, and WPA-PSK, WPA2 and WPA2-PSK.
•
Open
authentication does not provide security. When this option is chosen, the hand-held connects to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption.
• Under
Shared
authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802.11 wireless network communications channel.
• Under
WPA and WPA-PSK
authentication, the use of 802.1x authentication is required. For wireless networks without a Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) infrastructure, WPA supports the use of a preshared key. For wireless networks with a RADIUS infrastructure, Extensible Authentication
Protocol (EAP) and RADIUS is supported.
•
Encryption
:
WEP
(Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can choose
Disabled
from the drop-down encryption menu.
Otherwise, leave this field as is.
•
AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) is a standard for protecting data through encryption. AES supports key sizes of 128 bits, 192 bits and 256 bits and will serve as a replacement for the Data Encryption Standard (DES). In addition to the increased security that comes with larger key sizes, the AES algorithm is a symmetrical block cipher that can encrypt (encipher) and decrypt (decipher) information.
•
TKIP
(Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) uses the original WEP programming but wraps additional code at the beginning and end to encapsulate and modify it. Like WEP, TKIP uses the RC4 stream encryption algorithm as its basis. The new protocol, however, encrypts each data packet with a unique encryption key, and the keys are much stronger than those of its predecessor.
•
Network Key
: This field becomes available if you deselect
The key is automatically provided
. This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point. It is set to automatically provide a key by default.
Wireless Zero Config Settings F - 5
•
Key Index
: This field becomes available if you deselect
The key is automatically provided
. This field is used to identify the WEP key.
• Tap on
Next
to display the screen in which you can choose the
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)
type.
When
Use IEEE 802.1x network access control
is enabled,
EAP
types are available in the drop-down menu.
The items will vary depending on your network setup.
Keep in mind that some authentication protocols require that you select a Certificate. By tapping on the
Properties
button, you can select a
Certificate
.
• Tap on
Finish
when the configuration is complete.
APPENDIX G WIRELESS WIDE AREA
NETWORK (WWAN)
GWireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
Disconnecting from a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Advanced Packet Data Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
Manually Adding a New Modem Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
The Security Tab – Entering a PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-8
Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) G - 3
Wireless WAN
Motorola offers the Cinterion PH8-P HSPA+ WWAN radio. An Workabout Pro4 Hand-Held Computer equipped with a GSM/GPRS radio has wide area networking capabilities. With this radio and a SIM card, you can wirelessly transfer data, and you use the Workabout Pro4 voice option to place phone calls.
Navigation Bar Icons
Wireless WAN icons are displayed in the navigation bar at the top of the screen that identify the packet data service and the signal strength.
When a modem detects that a packet data service is available, a letter is added to the signal strength icon indicating the type of service. Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available, or if it is available but not yet initialized.
The symbols in the navigation bar identifying the modem connection are as follows:
• G - GSM/GPRS
• E - GSM/EDGE
• U - UMTS 3G
• H - UMTS/HSPA+
Establishing a Packet Data Connection
To display the
Data
tab through which you can configure a connection:
• Tap on the a
Navigation bar
at the top of the screen to display the hotkeys. Tap on the
Phone Settings
hotkey.
First, tap here to display your options.
Next, tap on the Phone
Settings hotkey.
• In the
Phone Settings
bubble, tap on
Settings
to display the phone setting tabs.
G - 4 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Tap here to display the phone setting tabs.
• Scroll to the
Data
tab.
Figure G-1
Data Tab
By default the connection uses CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol); however, if your ISP does not support CHAP, tapping in the box to the left of
PAP only authentication for:
directs the connection to use PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) instead.
• Tap on the
Create
button.
A home data connection is automatically set up.
Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) G - 5
• To connect to the Internet, tap on the
Start>Internet Explorer
icon.
NOTE
Any application that needs Internet access will establish a packet data connection – for example, e-mail.
Disconnecting from a Network
To disconnect from the network:
• Tap on the
navigation bar
at the top of the screen, and then tap on the
Phone Settings hotkey
. In the pop-up
Phone bubble
, tap on
Wireless Manager
.
• Tap on the
Menu
button in the softkey bar at the bottom of the
Wireless Manager
screen, and choose
Disconnect Cellular Data
.
Advanced Packet Data Configuration
In most cases, when a GSM/GPRS/EDGE radio and SIM are installed in your hand-held, setup is automatic.
Follow the steps outlined under the heading
“Establishing a Packet Data Connection” to make a connection.
The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes.
Manual configuration should only be necessary if:
• One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database. (The database should be corrected for subsequent software releases.)
• An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords.
• A very large site has its own Access Point Name (APN). Such connections must be configured manually.
• A customer has subscribed for a static IP address. By definition this must be configured manually.
G - 6 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Manually Adding a New Modem Connection
• Tap on
Start>Settings>Connections folder icon
. Tap on the
Connections
icon.
• Choose
Add a new modem connection
.
In most cases, you should choose
Add a new modem connection
from
ISP: WWAN - GPRS
. However, if you need to use a
Proxy
server, choose this option from
My Work Network
.
• Enter a
connection name
(optional).
• Choose
Cellular Line (GPRS)
from the
Modem
drop-down menu.
• Tap on
Next
.
Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) G - 7
• Type the
Access Point Name
, and tap on
Next
.
• If required, type a
User name
and
Password
.
• If you need to specify
TCP/IP
and
Server
information (i.e., you are using a static IP address) tap on the
Advanced...
button to complete the necessary details.
• Tap on
Finish
to create a new connection.
The Security Tab – Entering a PIN
This option allows you to assign a PIN (Personal Identification Number) so that your SIM card is protected from unauthorized use.
NOTE
For details about assigning a PIN number, refer to
Bands
By default, all frequency bands are enabled. Bands should not be disabled without knowledge about which bands are used by your network; an incorrect setting will prevent the WWAN modem from finding the network.
G - 8 Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Network Configuration
By default the radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks (allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agreement). You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour. For example, you might want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available. Abroad, you may find that an available network does not have GPRS roaming agreements. In this case, you’ll need to manually select the network which you know supports
GPRS roaming.
Automatic network selection is enabled by default. You can also choose a network manually from the drop-down menu.
NOTE
Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agreements. Even when a network is listed with an ‘Available’ status, it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers GPRS.
Hearing Aid
This tab allows you to enable the hearing aid service.
INDEX
Index
Numerics
1D internal scanner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2D imager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2D imager scanner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
36-key keyboard alpha keys, accessing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
uppercase letters, creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
A
About,
Bluetooth
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
About icon (software version)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
accessories carrying case
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Ethernet adaptor cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
four bay Ethernet cradle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
hand strap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
holster, soft shell
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
pistol grip
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
port replicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
vehicle cradle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
ActiveSync
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
adaptor cable
USB-Ethernet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
ALT Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
appending to bar codes characters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
App Launch Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
arrow keys moving the cursor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
audio indicators adjusting volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
description of beep conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
AutoRestore
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
B
backlight
Battery Power tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
intensity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Backlight tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
backlight timeout values
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
backplate, trigger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Backspace (DEL Key)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
backup profile, creating (Total Recall)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
backup Profile (Total Recall)
AutoRestore
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Clone to USB
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Restore
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
restoring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Upload to A.R.C.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
viewing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
backups, managing profiles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Bad Scan Beep
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
bar code appending to
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
displaying type of bar code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
good and bad scan, vibrate settings
Options tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Translation tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
barcode parameters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
bar code reader integrated scanner, operation of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
barcode reader integrated scanner, operation of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
batteries a description of
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Advanced (backlight) tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery (capacity) tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery Details tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery Health tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Index - II Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Battery Power tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Suspend Threshold tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
charging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
removing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
replacing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
swap time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
battery charger safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
–
Battery Power settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Baud, port replicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
beeper adjusting volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
description of beep conditions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Bluetooth
microphone, adjusting volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
pairing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
radio ISM band
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Bluetooth setup peripherals
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Bluetooth
setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
About Tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
GPRS setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Mode tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Paired tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Servers tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Boot to BooSt
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
built-in microphone, adjusting volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Code Page
Default Local ASCII
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
code page (Data Handling)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
cold reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
communication
ActiveSync
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Ethernet connection (four bay ethernet cradle)
Ethernet connection (single bay USB cradle)
WORKABOUT to PC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
connecting to a server with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Connections editing settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Fusion Wireless Companion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Internet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
managing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
modem setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
network, selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Network Cards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Proxy Server setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
VPN, setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Wireless Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Connections (Internet)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Connections (settings)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Contacts (Start screen)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
adding new
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
working with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Contrast adjustments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Copyright information, operating system
cradles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
installation at site
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
cradle See also Picker cradle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
CTRL Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
C
calendar attendees, assigning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
categories, using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
creating & editing entries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
deleting appointments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
reminders, creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
status, assigning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
calibrating touchscreen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
camera, using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
case, carrying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
charger safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
–
chargers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
installing at a site
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
operator controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
clean start
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Click Data
(scanner double-click)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Click Time
(scanner double-click)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
clone (Total Recall)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Clone to USB
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
D
Data Bits, port replicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
data entry modes handwriting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
typing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Data Handling (code page)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Data tab, setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Data Transmission
Paste data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Wedge data)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
DataWedge
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
debug (error handling)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Default Local ASCII
(Code Page)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
DEL (Backspace) Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
desktop screen (Home Screen)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Device ID tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
display backlight, adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
docking station
Index - III
uploading data using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
docking stations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
operator controls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
double-click appending characters to a decoded bar code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
scanner trigger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Double-Click
, Manage Triggers menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Dr. Debug
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
headsets, pairing (
Bluetooth
)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
holster, soft shell
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Home appearance, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Home icon (Start screen)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Home Screen (desktop screen)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
customizing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
hotkeys (navigation bar)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
HSP HFP (Headset Profile Hands-Free Profile) Service
Commands (Bluetooth pairing)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
E
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
folders
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Windows Vista and 7)
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Windows XP)
e-mail notification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Encryption (storage card)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Error Reporting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
ESC Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Excel Mobile
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
External Power settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
F
Favorites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Add Remove
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
file, renaming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
File Explorer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
copying a file
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
deleting file
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
folders, creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
renaming file
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
files & folders, managing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Flush Mount Pistol Grip, installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
folder, creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
folder, deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
folder, renaming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
four bay Ethernet cradle (WA4204-G2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Fusion Wireless Companion
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
G
Good and Bad Scan Vibrates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
Good Scan Beep
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
GPRS (
bluetooth)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
GPS (external)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
GSM UMTS radio modem connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
H
hand strap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
headset, adjusting volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
I
imager two dimensional (2D) imager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
imager (2D) scanner scanning
2D
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
imager options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
indicators
LED functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
scanner message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
softkey bar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
input modes handwriting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
typing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
integrated scanner option
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Internet connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Internet Explorer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
browsing web sites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Internet Sharing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
ISM band,
Bluetooth
radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
ISO-8859-1 Latin 1
(code page)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
K
keyboard
36-key keyboard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
alpha keys, 36-key keyboard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
one shot mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Scancode remapping
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Unicode Mapping
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
keyboard keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ALT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
arrow keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Backspace
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
CTRL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
DEL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
ESC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Macro keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
macro keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
modifiers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
navigating using the keyboard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
one shot mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Index - IV Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
SCAN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Scancode Remapping
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
SHIFT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
shift-state indicator icon
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
SPACE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Unicode Mapping
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
keypad, adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
keypad (phone)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Kiosk
Shell Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Advanced tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Application tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Phone tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Kiosk application
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
microSD Card, inserting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Microsoft® ActiveSync®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Mobile Device Center (Windows), setting up
Mode,
Bluetooth
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
modem setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Server Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
TCP_IP Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
modifier keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
OneShot Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
shift-state indicator icon
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
unlocking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
L
landscape orientation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
LED functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Lithium-ion batteries installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
removing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
replacing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Lock Sequence
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
N
name, assigning to Workabout Pro
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
navigation bar hotkeys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
shift-state indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
network, selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
network (phone), setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Note recording a message (audio)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
renaming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
soft keyboard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
text, converting handwriting into
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
transcriber
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Notes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Notification, setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Notifications and Sound, defining
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
M
Macro keys accessing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
deleting a macro
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
executing a macro
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Macros menu, accessing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
recording and saving
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Managed Programs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
mapping
Scancode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Unicode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Memory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Storage Card tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
menus pop-up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
messages
Scan Indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
scanner warning message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Scan Result
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Messaging
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Microphone, adjusting volume (Built-in, Headset and
Bluetooth)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
O
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile
,
On & Off button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
one dimensional internal scanner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
OneShot Mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
OneShot tab (modifier keys)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Options tab (bar codes)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
orientation, screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Windows Vista and 7)
Outlook e-mail, synchronizing (Windows XP)
P
Paired tab
(Bluetooth)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
pairing
Bluetooth
devices
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Parity, port replicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
Password (admin), changing (Kiosk)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Paste data
(Data Transmission)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
PC, connecting WORKABOUT to
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Personal apps
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
App Launch Keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Index - V
phone
Data tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
keypad
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
keypad tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Network (phone), setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
phone keys (on the EP10 keyboard)
PIN, changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
ring tone adjustments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
security tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Services, setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
settings, managing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
sound tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
using (Windows Mobile 6.5 Professional)
Voice Mail, setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Phone communication
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
phone network, setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
picker cradle installing cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Pictures deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
editing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
slide show, creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Pictures and Videos
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
pistol grip
Flush Mount, installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
trigger backplate, installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Pocket Word
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
portrait orientation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
port replicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Port Replicator settings (COM5 and COM6)
Baud
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10
Data Bits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10
Parity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10
Port B (COM6), Power
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10
Stop Bits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-11
Trigger On Sequence
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-11
Power
Advanced tab (backlight timeout)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery (capacity) tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery Details tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery Health tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Suspend Threshold tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
to Port B (COM6)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-10
Power button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Profile restoring backup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
viewing backup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
profile, creating backup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Programs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
minimizing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
protective case
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
proxy server, setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT Key)
Q
Query Services (Bluetooth pairing)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
R
recalibrating touchscreen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Regional Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Registry Editor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
remapping
Scancode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Unicode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Remote Desktop Mobile
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Remove Programs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
resetting
Boot to BooSt
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
clean start
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
cold reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
warm reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Restore Now
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
ring tone adjustments (phone)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
S
safety instructions battery charger
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
–
scanner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
safety warning, scanner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Scancode remapping
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Scan Indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
SCAN Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Scan Log File
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
scanner one dimensional (1D) internal scanner
safety warnings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
techniques (scanning)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
troubleshooting tips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
two dimensional (2D) imager scanner
Use LED lighting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
scanner options
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Scanner services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
scanning
1D internal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
appending characters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Bad Scan Beep
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
bar code settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Click Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Data Handling (code page)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
double-click
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Good and Bad Scan Vibrates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
Good Scan Beep
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
Index - VI Workabout Pro4 (Windows Embedded Hand-Held 6.5) User Manual
Options tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Scan Indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Scan Log File
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Scan Result
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Scan Result Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
symbologies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Translations tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
Scan Result
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Scan Result Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
screen stylus, using to navigate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
touch pen, using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Windows Embedded CE, navigating
scrolling, adjusting speed (Up_Down tab)
security, setting up phone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Server Settings (modem setup)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Server tab
(Bluetooth)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
OBEX OPP (Object Exchange-Object Push Profile)
Scanner
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Serial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Set for AutoRestore
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Personal Tab
OneShot tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Up_Down tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Task Manager, working with
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Settings tab (error level & log folder)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Shell Settings (Kiosk)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Advanced tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Application tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Phone tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
SHIFT Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
shift-state indicator, accessing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
shift-state indicator (navigation bar)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
SIM card, inserting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Single Bay USB Cradle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Sled See vehicle cradle.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
SNTP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
softkey (softkey bar)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
softkey bar softkey
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
soft keyboard icon
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
softkeys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
soft keyboard, using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
soft keyboard icon (softkey bar)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
softkeys (softkey bar)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Soft Scan Timeout
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
sound, adjusting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Sound, setting events
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sound and Notifications, defining
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sound settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
SPACE Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Start Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Start screen
Contacts icon
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Home icon
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Status tab, browsing error logs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Stop Bits, port replicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Storage Card tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
stylus (touch pen), using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
suspend (turn off screen)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
swap time (for battery)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
symbologies, barcode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
synchronizing e-mail (Windows Vista and 7)
synchronizing e-mail (Windows XP)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
System apps
About
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Admin Password, changing (Kiosk)
Backlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Battery Power settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Contrast
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Encryption
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Error Reporting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
External Power settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
GPS (external)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Kiosk
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Managed Programs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Memory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
trigger mappings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
T
Tab Key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
task completed (marking as)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
editing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
notification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
sorting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Task Manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
TCP_IP Settings (modem setup)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Terminal Services Client
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
session, disconnecting (without ending)
session, ending
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Total Recall
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
AutoRestore Profile
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
backup profile, creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
backup Profile, restoring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
clone, creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Clone to USB
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
managing profiles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Restore Profile
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Upload to A.R.C.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Index - VII
view Profile
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
touch pen, using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
touchscreen locking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
orientation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
recalibration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
stylus, using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
touch pen, using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
transcriber (handwritten note)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Translations parameters (bar codes)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
trigger backplate kit, installing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
trigger mappings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Trigger On Sequence, port replicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-11
Trigger Press Type
, Manage Triggers menu
troubleshooting tips (scanning)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
TweakIT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
TweakIt
Registry Editor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Scanner services
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
SNTP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Windows Vista®
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Windows Zero Config
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-3
Wireless Zero Config
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
Word Mobile data entry modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Word
See
Pocket Word
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Workabout Pro4i model number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xviii
WWAN (Wireless Wide Area Network)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .G-3
GSM UMTS radio modem connection
Z
Zero Config, Wireless
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
U
Unicode Mapping
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Up_Down tab (scrolling adjustments)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Upload to A.R.C.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
USB-Ethernet adaptor cable (WA4010)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Use LED lighting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
Utilities tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
V
vehicle cradle
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
powered 10-55 VDC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
powered 12 VDC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
unpowered
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Version tab
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
vibrate, setting up for incoming calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Vibrates, Good and Bad Scan
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
video recorder, using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Videos and Pictures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Voice phone communication
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
voice mail, setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
VPN connection, setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
W
warm reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
warnings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
Wedge data
(Data Transmission)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
Windows 7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Windows Embedded CE, navigating in
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Windows Mobile Device Center, setting up
Motorola Solutions, Inc.
1301 E. Algonquin Rd.
Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.
http://www.motorolasolutions.com
MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2014 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
8000295 Revision A - January 2014
Λήψη
Δημόσιος σύνδεσμος ενημερώθηκε
Ο δημόσιος σύνδεσμος για τη συνομιλία σας ενημερώθηκε. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Δημόσιος σύνδεσμος εγγράφου
Διαφήμιση
